## Are you sure?

This action might not be possible to undo. Are you sure you want to continue?

**A Friendly Introduction for Electrical and Computer Engineers
**

Second Edition

Quiz Solutions

Roy D. Yates and David J. Goodman

May 22, 2004

• The MATLAB section quizzes at the end of each chapter use programs available for

download as the archive matcode.zip. This archive has programs of general pur-

pose programs for solving probability problems as well as speciﬁc .m ﬁles associated

with examples or quizzes in the text. Also available is a manual probmatlab.pdf

describing the general purpose .m ﬁles in matcode.zip.

• We have made a substantial effort to check the solution to every quiz. Nevertheless,

there is a nonzero probability (in fact, a probability close to unity) that errors will be

found. If you ﬁnd errors or have suggestions or comments, please send email to

ryates@winlab.rutgers.edu.

When errors are found, corrected solutions will be posted at the website.

1

Quiz Solutions – Chapter 1

Quiz 1.1

In the Venn diagrams for parts (a)-(g) below, the shaded area represents the indicated

set.

M

O

T

M

O

T

M

O

T

(1) R = T

c

(2) M ∪ O (3) M ∩ O

M

O

T

M

O

T

M

O

T

(4) R ∪ M (4) R ∩ M (6) T

c

− M

Quiz 1.2

(1) A

1

= {vvv, vvd, vdv, vdd}

(2) B

1

= {dvv, dvd, ddv, ddd}

(3) A

2

= {vvv, vvd, dvv, dvd}

(4) B

2

= {vdv, vdd, ddv, ddd}

(5) A

3

= {vvv, ddd}

(6) B

3

= {vdv, dvd}

(7) A

4

= {vvv, vvd, vdv, dvv, vdd, dvd, ddv}

(8) B

4

= {ddd, ddv, dvd, vdd}

Recall that A

i

and B

i

are collectively exhaustive if A

i

∪ B

i

= S. Also, A

i

and B

i

are

mutually exclusive if A

i

∩ B

i

= φ. Since we have written down each pair A

i

and B

i

above,

we can simply check for these properties.

The pair A

1

and B

1

are mutually exclusive and collectively exhaustive. The pair A

2

and

B

2

are mutually exclusive and collectively exhaustive. The pair A

3

and B

3

are mutually

exclusive but not collectively exhaustive. The pair A

4

and B

4

are not mutually exclusive

since dvd belongs to A

4

and B

4

. However, A

4

and B

4

are collectively exhaustive.

2

Quiz 1.3

There are exactly 50 equally likely outcomes: s

51

through s

100

. Each of these outcomes

has probability 0.02.

(1) P[{s

79

}] = 0.02

(2) P[{s

100

}] = 0.02

(3) P[A] = P[{s

90

, . . . , s

100

}] = 11 ×0.02 = 0.22

(4) P[F] = P[{s

51

, . . . , s

59

}] = 9 ×0.02 = 0.18

(5) P[T ≥ 80] = P[{s

80

, . . . , s

100

}] = 21 ×0.02 = 0.42

(6) P[T < 90] = P[{s

51

, s

52

, . . . , s

89

}] = 39 ×0.02 = 0.78

(7) P[a C grade or better] = P[{s

70

, . . . , s

100

}] = 31 ×0.02 = 0.62

(8) P[student passes] = P[{s

60

, . . . , s

100

}] = 41 ×0.02 = 0.82

Quiz 1.4

We can describe this experiment by the event space consisting of the four possible

events V B, V L, DB, and DL. We represent these events in the table:

V D

L 0.35 ?

B ? ?

In a roundabout way, the problem statement tells us how to ﬁll in the table. In particular,

P [V] = 0.7 = P [V L] + P [V B] (1)

P [L] = 0.6 = P [V L] + P [DL] (2)

Since P[V L] = 0.35, we can conclude that P[V B] = 0.35 and that P[DL] = 0.6 −

0.35 = 0.25. This allows us to ﬁll in two more table entries:

V D

L 0.35 0.25

B 0.35 ?

The remaining table entry is ﬁlled in by observing that the probabilities must sum to 1.

This implies P[DB] = 0.05 and the complete table is

V D

L 0.35 0.25

B 0.35 0.05

Finding the various probabilities is now straightforward:

3

(1) P[DL] = 0.25

(2) P[D ∪ L] = P[V L] + P[DL] + P[DB] = 0.35 +0.25 +0.05 = 0.65.

(3) P[V B] = 0.35

(4) P[V ∪ L] = P[V] + P[L] − P[V L] = 0.7 +0.6 −0.35 = 0.95

(5) P[V ∪ D] = P[S] = 1

(6) P[LB] = P[LL

c

] = 0

Quiz 1.5

(1) The probability of exactly two voice calls is

P [N

V

= 2] = P [{vvd, vdv, dvv}] = 0.3 (1)

(2) The probability of at least one voice call is

P [N

V

≥ 1] = P [{vdd, dvd, ddv, vvd, vdv, dvv, vvv}] (2)

= 6(0.1) +0.2 = 0.8 (3)

An easier way to get the same answer is to observe that

P [N

V

≥ 1] = 1 − P [N

V

< 1] = 1 − P [N

V

= 0] = 1 − P [{ddd}] = 0.8 (4)

(3) The conditional probability of two voice calls followed by a data call given that there

were two voice calls is

P [{vvd} |N

V

= 2] =

P [{vvd} , N

V

= 2]

P [N

V

= 2]

=

P [{vvd}]

P [N

V

= 2]

=

0.1

0.3

=

1

3

(5)

(4) The conditional probability of two data calls followed by a voice call given there

were two voice calls is

P [{ddv} |N

V

= 2] =

P [{ddv} , N

V

= 2]

P [N

V

= 2]

= 0 (6)

The joint event of the outcome ddv and exactly two voice calls has probability zero

since there is only one voice call in the outcome ddv.

(5) The conditional probability of exactly two voice calls given at least one voice call is

P [N

V

= 2|N

v

≥ 1] =

P [N

V

= 2, N

V

≥ 1]

P [N

V

≥ 1]

=

P [N

V

= 2]

P [N

V

≥ 1]

=

0.3

0.8

=

3

8

(7)

(6) The conditional probability of at least one voice call given there were exactly two

voice calls is

P [N

V

≥ 1|N

V

= 2] =

P [N

V

≥ 1, N

V

= 2]

P [N

V

= 2]

=

P [N

V

= 2]

P [N

V

= 2]

= 1 (8)

Given that there were two voice calls, there must have been at least one voice call.

4

Quiz 1.6

In this experiment, there are four outcomes with probabilities

P[{vv}] = (0.8)

2

= 0.64 P[{vd}] = (0.8)(0.2) = 0.16

P[{dv}] = (0.2)(0.8) = 0.16 P[{dd}] = (0.2)

2

= 0.04

When checking the independence of any two events A and B, it’s wise to avoid intuition

and simply check whether P[AB] = P[A]P[B]. Using the probabilities of the outcomes,

we now can test for the independence of events.

(1) First, we calculate the probability of the joint event:

P [N

V

= 2, N

V

≥ 1] = P [N

V

= 2] = P [{vv}] = 0.64 (1)

Next, we observe that

P [N

V

≥ 1] = P [{vd, dv, vv}] = 0.96 (2)

Finally, we make the comparison

P [N

V

= 2] P [N

V

≥ 1] = (0.64)(0.96) = P [N

V

= 2, N

V

≥ 1] (3)

which shows the two events are dependent.

(2) The probability of the joint event is

P [N

V

≥ 1, C

1

= v] = P [{vd, vv}] = 0.80 (4)

From part (a), P[N

V

≥ 1] = 0.96. Further, P[C

1

= v] = 0.8 so that

P [N

V

≥ 1] P [C

1

= v] = (0.96)(0.8) = 0.768 = P [N

V

≥ 1, C

1

= v] (5)

Hence, the events are dependent.

(3) The problem statement that the calls were independent implies that the events the

second call is a voice call, {C

2

= v}, and the ﬁrst call is a data call, {C

1

= d} are

independent events. Just to be sure, we can do the calculations to check:

P [C

1

= d, C

2

= v] = P [{dv}] = 0.16 (6)

Since P[C

1

= d]P[C

2

= v] = (0.2)(0.8) = 0.16, we conﬁrm that the events are

independent. Note that this shouldn’t be surprising since we used the information that

the calls were independent in the problem statement to determine the probabilities of

the outcomes.

(4) The probability of the joint event is

P [C

2

= v, N

V

is even] = P [{vv}] = 0.64 (7)

Also, each event has probability

P [C

2

= v] = P [{dv, vv}] = 0.8, P [N

V

is even] = P [{dd, vv}] = 0.68 (8)

Thus, P[C

2

= v]P[N

V

is even] = (0.8)(0.68) = 0.544. Since P[C

2

= v, N

V

is even] =

0.544, the events are dependent.

5

Quiz 1.7

Let F

i

denote the event that that the user is found on page i . The tree for the experiment

is

¨

¨

¨

¨

¨

¨

F

1

0.8

F

c

1

0.2

¨

¨

¨

¨

¨

¨

F

2

0.8

F

c

2

0.2

¨

¨

¨

¨

¨

¨

F

3

0.8

F

c

3

0.2

The user is found unless all three paging attempts fail. Thus the probability the user is

found is

P [F] = 1 − P

_

F

c

1

F

c

2

F

c

3

_

= 1 −(0.2)

3

= 0.992 (1)

Quiz 1.8

(1) We can view choosing each bit in the code word as a subexperiment. Each subex-

periment has two possible outcomes: 0 and 1. Thus by the fundamental principle of

counting, there are 2 ×2 ×2 ×2 = 2

4

= 16 possible code words.

(2) An experiment that can yield all possible code words with two zeroes is to choose

which 2 bits (out of 4 bits) will be zero. The other two bits then must be ones. There

are

_

4

2

_

= 6 ways to do this. Hence, there are six code words with exactly two zeroes.

For this problem, it is also possible to simply enumerate the six code words:

1100, 1010, 1001, 0101, 0110, 0011.

(3) When the ﬁrst bit must be a zero, then the ﬁrst subexperiment of choosing the ﬁrst

bit has only one outcome. For each of the next three bits, we have two choices. In

this case, there are 1 ×2 ×2 ×2 = 8 ways of choosing a code word.

(4) For the constant ratio code, we can specify a code word by choosing M of the bits to

be ones. The other N −M bits will be zeroes. The number of ways of choosing such

a code word is

_

N

M

_

. For N = 8 and M = 3, there are

_

8

3

_

= 56 code words.

Quiz 1.9

(1) In this problem, k bits received in error is the same as k failures in 100 trials. The

failure probability is = 1 − p and the success probability is 1 − = p. That is, the

probability of k bits in error and 100 −k correctly received bits is

P

_

S

k,100−k

_

=

_

100

k

_

k

(1 −)

100−k

(1)

6

For = 0.01,

P

_

S

0,100

_

= (1 −)

100

= (0.99)

100

= 0.3660 (2)

P

_

S

1,99

_

= 100(0.01)(0.99)

99

= 0.3700 (3)

P

_

S

2,98

_

= 4950(0.01)

2

(0.99)

9

8 = 0.1849 (4)

P

_

S

3,97

_

= 161, 700(0.01)

3

(0.99)

97

= 0.0610 (5)

(2) The probability a packet is decoded correctly is just

P [C] = P

_

S

0,100

_

+ P

_

S

1,99

_

+ P

_

S

2,98

_

+ P

_

S

3,97

_

= 0.9819 (6)

Quiz 1.10

Since the chip works only if all n transistors work, the transistors in the chip are like

devices in series. The probability that a chip works is P[C] = p

n

.

The module works if either 8 chips work or 9 chips work. Let C

k

denote the event that

exactly k chips work. Since transistor failures are independent of each other, chip failures

are also independent. Thus each P[C

k

] has the binomial probability

P [C

8

] =

_

9

8

_

(P [C])

8

(1 − P [C])

9−8

= 9p

8n

(1 − p

n

), (1)

P [C

9

] = (P [C])

9

= p

9n

. (2)

The probability a memory module works is

P [M] = P [C

8

] + P [C

9

] = p

8n

(9 −8p

n

) (3)

Quiz 1.11

R=rand(1,100);

X=(R<= 0.4) ...

+ (2*(R>0.4).*(R<=0.9)) ...

+ (3*(R>0.9));

Y=hist(X,1:3)

For a MATLAB simulation, we ﬁrst gen-

erate a vector R of 100 random numbers.

Second, we generate vector X as a func-

tion of R to represent the 3 possible out-

comes of a ﬂip. That is, X(i)=1 if ﬂip i

was heads, X(i)=2 if ﬂip i was tails, and

X(i)=3) is ﬂip i landed on the edge.

To see how this works, we note there are three cases:

• If R(i) <= 0.4, then X(i)=1.

• If 0.4 < R(i) and R(i)<=0.9, then X(i)=2.

• If 0.9 < R(i), then X(i)=3.

These three cases will have probabilities 0.4, 0.5 and 0.1. Lastly, we use the hist function

to count how many occurences of each possible value of X(i).

7

Quiz Solutions – Chapter 2

Quiz 2.1

The sample space, probabilities and corresponding grades for the experiment are

Outcome P[·] G

BB 0.36 3.0

BC 0.24 2.5

CB 0.24 2.5

CC 0.16 2

Quiz 2.2

(1) To ﬁnd c, we recall that the PMF must sum to 1. That is,

3

n=1

P

N

(n) = c

_

1 +

1

2

+

1

3

_

= 1 (1)

This implies c = 6/11. Now that we have found c, the remaining parts are straight-

forward.

(2) P[N = 1] = P

N

(1) = c = 6/11

(3) P[N ≥ 2] = P

N

(2) + P

N

(3) = c/2 +c/3 = 5/11

(4) P[N > 3] =

∞

n=4

P

N

(n) = 0

Quiz 2.3

Decoding each transmitted bit is an independent trial where we call a bit error a “suc-

cess.” Each bit is in error, that is, the trial is a success, with probability p. Now we can

interpret each experiment in the generic context of independent trials.

(1) The random variable X is the number of trials up to and including the ﬁrst success.

Similar to Example 2.11, X has the geometric PMF

P

X

(x) =

_

p(1 − p)

x−1

x = 1, 2, . . .

0 otherwise

(1)

(2) If p = 0.1, then the probability exactly 10 bits are sent is

P [X = 10] = P

X

(10) = (0.1)(0.9)

9

= 0.0387 (2)

8

The probability that at least 10 bits are sent is P[X ≥ 10] =

∞

x=10

P

X

(x). This

sum is not too hard to calculate. However, its even easier to observe that X ≥ 10 if

the ﬁrst 10 bits are transmitted correctly. That is,

P [X ≥ 10] = P [ﬁrst 10 bits are correct] = (1 − p)

10

(3)

For p = 0.1, P[X ≥ 10] = 0.9

10

= 0.3487.

(3) The random variable Y is the number of successes in 100 independent trials. Just as

in Example 2.13, Y has the binomial PMF

P

Y

(y) =

_

100

y

_

p

y

(1 − p)

100−y

(4)

If p = 0.01, the probability of exactly 2 errors is

P [Y = 2] = P

Y

(2) =

_

100

2

_

(0.01)

2

(0.99)

98

= 0.1849 (5)

(4) The probability of no more than 2 errors is

P [Y ≤ 2] = P

Y

(0) + P

Y

(1) + P

Y

(2) (6)

= (0.99)

100

+100(0.01)(0.99)

99

+

_

100

2

_

(0.01)

2

(0.99)

98

(7)

= 0.9207 (8)

(5) Random variable Z is the number of trials up to and including the third success. Thus

Z has the Pascal PMF (see Example 2.15)

P

Z

(z) =

_

z −1

2

_

p

3

(1 − p)

z−3

(9)

Note that P

Z

(z) > 0 for z = 3, 4, 5, . . ..

(6) If p = 0.25, the probability that the third error occurs on bit 12 is

P

Z

(12) =

_

11

2

_

(0.25)

3

(0.75)

9

= 0.0645 (10)

Quiz 2.4

Each of these probabilities can be read off the CDF F

Y

(y). However, we must keep in

mind that when F

Y

(y) has a discontinuity at y

0

, F

Y

(y) takes the upper value F

Y

(y

+

0

).

(1) P[Y < 1] = F

Y

(1

−

) = 0

9

(2) P[Y ≤ 1] = F

Y

(1) = 0.6

(3) P[Y > 2] = 1 − P[Y ≤ 2] = 1 − F

Y

(2) = 1 −0.8 = 0.2

(4) P[Y ≥ 2] = 1 − P[Y < 2] = 1 − F

Y

(2

−

) = 1 −0.6 = 0.4

(5) P[Y = 1] = P[Y ≤ 1] − P[Y < 1] = F

Y

(1

+

) − F

Y

(1

−

) = 0.6

(6) P[Y = 3] = P[Y ≤ 3] − P[Y < 3] = F

Y

(3

+

) − F

Y

(3

−

) = 0.8 −0.8 = 0

Quiz 2.5

(1) With probability 0.7, a call is a voice call and C = 25. Otherwise, with probability

0.3, we have a data call and C = 40. This corresponds to the PMF

P

C

(c) =

⎧

⎨

⎩

0.7 c = 25

0.3 c = 40

0 otherwise

(1)

(2) The expected value of C is

E [C] = 25(0.7) +40(0.3) = 29.5 cents (2)

Quiz 2.6

(1) As a function of N, the cost T is

T = 25N +40(3 − N) = 120 −15N (1)

(2) To ﬁnd the PMF of T, we can draw the following tree:

¨

¨

¨

¨

¨

¨

¨

N=0

0.1

r

r

r

r

r

r

r

N=3

0.3

$

$

$

$

$

$

$N=1 0.3

N=2 0.3

•T=120

•T=105

•T=90

•T=75

From the tree, we can write down the PMF of T:

P

T

(t ) =

⎧

⎨

⎩

0.3 t = 75, 90, 105

0.1 t = 120

0 otherwise

(2)

From the PMF P

T

(t ), the expected value of T is

E [T] = 75P

T

(75) +90P

T

(90) +105P

T

(105) +120P

T

(120) (3)

= (75 +90 +105)(0.3) +120(0.1) = 62 (4)

10

Quiz 2.7

(1) Using Deﬁnition 2.14, the expected number of applications is

E [A] =

4

a=1

aP

A

(a) = 1(0.4) +2(0.3) +3(0.2) +4(0.1) = 2 (1)

(2) The number of memory chips is M = g(A) where

g(A) =

⎧

⎨

⎩

4 A = 1, 2

6 A = 3

8 A = 4

(2)

(3) By Theorem 2.10, the expected number of memory chips is

E [M] =

4

a=1

g(A)P

A

(a) = 4(0.4) +4(0.3) +6(0.2) +8(0.1) = 4.8 (3)

Since E[A] = 2, g(E[A]) = g(2) = 4. However, E[M] = 4.8 = g(E[A]). The two

quantities are different because g(A) is not of the form αA +β.

Quiz 2.8

The PMF P

N

(n) allows to calculate each of the desired quantities.

(1) The expected value of N is

E [N] =

2

n=0

nP

N

(n) = 0(0.1) +1(0.4) +2(0.5) = 1.4 (1)

(2) The second moment of N is

E

_

N

2

_

=

2

n=0

n

2

P

N

(n) = 0

2

(0.1) +1

2

(0.4) +2

2

(0.5) = 2.4 (2)

(3) The variance of N is

Var[N] = E

_

N

2

_

−(E [N])

2

= 2.4 −(1.4)

2

= 0.44 (3)

(4) The standard deviation is σ

N

=

√

Var[N] =

√

0.44 = 0.663.

11

Quiz 2.9

(1) From the problem statement, we learn that the conditional PMF of N given the event

I is

P

N|I

(n) =

_

0.02 n = 1, 2, . . . , 50

0 otherwise

(1)

(2) Also from the problem statement, the conditional PMF of N given the event T is

P

N|T

(n) =

_

0.2 n = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5

0 otherwise

(2)

(3) The problem statement tells us that P[T] = 1 − P[I ] = 3/4. From Theorem 1.10

(the law of total probability), we ﬁnd the PMF of N is

P

N

(n) = P

N|T

(n) P [T] + P

N|I

(n) P [I ] (3)

=

⎧

⎨

⎩

0.2(0.75) +0.02(0.25) n = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5

0(0.75) +0.02(0.25) n = 6, 7, . . . , 50

0 otherwise

(4)

=

⎧

⎨

⎩

0.155 n = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5

0.005 n = 6, 7, . . . , 50

0 otherwise

(5)

(4) First we ﬁnd

P [N ≤ 10] =

10

n=1

P

N

(n) = (0.155)(5) +(0.005)(5) = 0.80 (6)

By Theorem 2.17, the conditional PMF of N given N ≤ 10 is

P

N|N≤10

(n) =

_

P

N

(n)

P[N≤10]

n ≤ 10

0 otherwise

(7)

=

⎧

⎨

⎩

0.155/0.8 n = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5

0.005/0.8 n = 6, 7, 8, 9, 10

0 otherwise

(8)

=

⎧

⎨

⎩

0.19375 n = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5

0.00625 n = 6, 7, 8, 9, 10

0 otherwise

(9)

(5) Once we have the conditional PMF, calculating conditional expectations is easy.

E [N|N ≤ 10] =

n

nP

N|N≤10

(n) (10)

=

5

n=1

n(0.19375) +

10

n=6

n(0.00625) (11)

= 3.15625 (12)

12

0 50 100

0

2

4

6

8

10

0 500 1000

0

2

4

6

8

10

(a) samplemean(100) (b) samplemean(1000)

Figure 1: Two examples of the output of samplemean(k)

(6) To ﬁnd the conditional variance, we ﬁrst ﬁnd the conditional second moment

E

_

N

2

|N ≤ 10

_

=

n

n

2

P

N|N≤10

(n) (13)

=

5

n=1

n

2

(0.19375) +

10

n=6

n

2

(0.00625) (14)

= 55(0.19375) +330(0.00625) = 12.71875 (15)

The conditional variance is

Var[N|N ≤ 10] = E

_

N

2

|N ≤ 10

_

−(E [N|N ≤ 10])

2

(16)

= 12.71875 −(3.15625)

2

= 2.75684 (17)

Quiz 2.10

The function samplemean(k) generates and plots ﬁve m

n

sequences for n = 1, 2, . . . , k.

The i th column M(:,i) of M holds a sequence m

1

, m

2

, . . . , m

k

.

function M=samplemean(k);

K=(1:k)’;

M=zeros(k,5);

for i=1:5,

X=duniformrv(0,10,k);

M(:,i)=cumsum(X)./K;

end;

plot(K,M);

Examples of the function calls (a) samplemean(100) and (b) samplemean(1000)

are shown in Figure 1. Each time samplemean(k) is called produces a random output.

What is observed in these ﬁgures is that for small n, m

n

is fairly random but as n gets

13

large, m

n

gets close to E[X] = 5. Although each sequence m

1

, m

2

, . . . that we generate is

random, the sequences always converges to E[X]. This random convergence is analyzed

in Chapter 7.

14

Quiz Solutions – Chapter 3

Quiz 3.1

The CDF of Y is

0 2 4

0

0.5

1

y

F

Y

(

y

)

F

Y

(y) =

⎧

⎨

⎩

0 y < 0

y/4 0 ≤ y ≤ 4

1 y > 4

(1)

From the CDF F

Y

(y), we can calculate the probabilities:

(1) P[Y ≤ −1] = F

Y

(−1) = 0

(2) P[Y ≤ 1] = F

Y

(1) = 1/4

(3) P[2 < Y ≤ 3] = F

Y

(3) − F

Y

(2) = 3/4 −2/4 = 1/4

(4) P[Y > 1.5] = 1 − P[Y ≤ 1.5] = 1 − F

Y

(1.5) = 1 −(1.5)/4 = 5/8

Quiz 3.2

(1) First we will ﬁnd the constant c and then we will sketch the PDF. To ﬁnd c, we use

the fact that

_

∞

−∞

f

X

(x) dx = 1. We will evaluate this integral using integration by

parts:

_

∞

−∞

f

X

(x) dx =

_

∞

0

cxe

−x/2

dx (1)

= −2cxe

−x/2

¸

¸

¸

∞

0

. ,, .

=0

+

_

∞

0

2ce

−x/2

dx (2)

= −4ce

−x/2

¸

¸

¸

∞

0

= 4c (3)

Thus c = 1/4 and X has the Erlang (n = 2, λ = 1/2) PDF

0 5 10 15

0

0.1

0.2

x

f

X

(

x

)

f

X

(x) =

_

(x/4)e

−x/2

x ≥ 0

0 otherwise

(4)

15

(2) To ﬁnd the CDF F

X

(x), we ﬁrst note X is a nonnegative random variable so that

F

X

(x) = 0 for all x < 0. For x ≥ 0,

F

X

(x) =

_

x

0

f

X

(y) dy =

_

x

0

y

4

e

−y/2

dy (5)

= −

y

2

e

−y/2

¸

¸

¸

x

0

−

_

x

0

−

1

2

e

−y/2

dy (6)

= 1 −

x

2

e

−x/2

−e

−x/2

(7)

The complete expression for the CDF is

0 5 10 15

0

0.5

1

x

F

X

(

x

)

F

X

(x) =

_

1 −

_

x

2

+1

_

e

−x/2

x ≥ 0

0 otherwise

(8)

(3) From the CDF F

X

(x),

P [0 ≤ X ≤ 4] = F

X

(4) − F

X

(0) = 1 −3e

−2

. (9)

(4) Similarly,

P [−2 ≤ X ≤ 2] = F

X

(2) − F

X

(−2) = 1 −3e

−1

. (10)

Quiz 3.3

The PDF of Y is

−2 0 2

0

1

2

3

y

f

Y

(

y

)

f

Y

(y) =

_

3y

2

/2 −1 ≤ y ≤ 1,

0 otherwise.

(1)

(1) The expected value of Y is

E [Y] =

_

∞

−∞

y f

Y

(y) dy =

_

1

−1

(3/2)y

3

dy = (3/8)y

4

¸

¸

¸

1

−1

= 0. (2)

Note that the above calculation wasn’t really necessary because E[Y] = 0 whenever

the PDF f

Y

(y) is an even function (i.e., f

Y

(y) = f

Y

(−y)).

(2) The second moment of Y is

E

_

Y

2

_

=

_

∞

−∞

y

2

f

Y

(y) dy =

_

1

−1

(3/2)y

4

dy = (3/10)y

5

¸

¸

¸

1

−1

= 3/5. (3)

16

(3) The variance of Y is

Var[Y] = E

_

Y

2

_

−(E [Y])

2

= 3/5. (4)

(4) The standard deviation of Y is σ

Y

=

√

Var[Y] =

√

3/5.

Quiz 3.4

(1) When X is an exponential (λ) random variable, E[X] = 1/λ and Var[X] = 1/λ

2

.

Since E[X] = 3 and Var[X] = 9, we must have λ = 1/3. The PDF of X is

f

X

(x) =

_

(1/3)e

−x/3

x ≥ 0,

0 otherwise.

(1)

(2) We know X is a uniform (a, b) random variable. To ﬁnd a and b, we apply Theo-

rem 3.6 to write

E [X] =

a +b

2

= 3 Var[X] =

(b −a)

2

12

= 9. (2)

This implies

a +b = 6, b −a = ±6

√

3. (3)

The only valid solution with a < b is

a = 3 −3

√

3, b = 3 +3

√

3. (4)

The complete expression for the PDF of X is

f

X

(x) =

_

1/(6

√

3) 3 −3

√

3 ≤ x < 3 +3

√

3,

0 otherwise.

(5)

Quiz 3.5

Each of the requested probabilities can be calculated using (z) function and Table 3.1

or Q(z) and Table 3.2. We start with the sketches.

(1) The PDFs of X and Y are shown below. The fact that Y has twice the standard

deviation of X is reﬂected in the greater spread of f

Y

(y). However, it is important

to remember that as the standard deviation increases, the peak value of the Gaussian

PDF goes down.

−5 0 5

0

0.2

0.4

x y

f

X

(

x

)

f

Y

(

y

)

← f

X

(x)

← f

Y

(y)

17

(2) Since X is Gaussian (0, 1),

P [−1 < X ≤ 1] = F

X

(1) − F

X

(−1) (1)

= (1) −(−1) = 2(1) −1 = 0.6826. (2)

(3) Since Y is Gaussian (0, 2),

P [−1 < Y ≤ 1] = F

Y

(1) − F

Y

(−1) (3)

=

_

1

σ

Y

_

−

_

−1

σ

Y

_

= 2

_

1

2

_

−1 = 0.383. (4)

(4) Again, since X is Gaussian (0, 1), P[X > 3.5] = Q(3.5) = 2.33 ×10

−4

.

(5) Since Y is Gaussian (0, 2), P[Y > 3.5] = Q(

3.5

2

) = Q(1.75) = 1 − (1.75) =

0.0401.

Quiz 3.6

The CDF of X is

−2 0 2

0

0.5

1

x

F

X

(

x

)

F

X

(x) =

⎧

⎨

⎩

0 x < −1,

(x +1)/4 −1 ≤ x < 1,

1 x ≥ 1.

(1)

The following probabilities can be read directly from the CDF:

(1) P[X ≤ 1] = F

X

(1) = 1.

(2) P[X < 1] = F

X

(1

−

) = 1/2.

(3) P[X = 1] = F

X

(1

+

) − F

X

(1

−

) = 1 −1/2 = 1/2.

(4) We ﬁnd the PDF f

Y

(y) by taking the derivative of F

Y

(y). The resulting PDF is

−2 0 2

0

0.5

x

f

X

(

x

)

0.5

f

X

(x) =

⎧

⎨

⎩

1/4 −1 ≤ x < 1,

(1/2)δ(x −1) x = 1,

0 otherwise.

(2)

Quiz 3.7

18

(1) Since X is always nonnegative, F

X

(x) = 0 for x < 0. Also, F

X

(x) = 1 for x ≥ 2

since its always true that x ≤ 2. Lastly, for 0 ≤ x ≤ 2,

F

X

(x) =

_

x

−∞

f

X

(y) dy =

_

x

0

(1 − y/2) dy = x − x

2

/4. (1)

The complete CDF of X is

−1 0 1 2 3

0

0.5

1

x

F

X

(

x

)

F

X

(x) =

⎧

⎨

⎩

0 x < 0,

x − x

2

/4 0 ≤ x ≤ 2,

1 x > 2.

(2)

(2) The probability that Y = 1 is

P [Y = 1] = P [X ≥ 1] = 1 − F

X

(1) = 1 −3/4 = 1/4. (3)

(3) Since X is nonnegative, Y is also nonnegative. Thus F

Y

(y) = 0 for y < 0. Also,

because Y ≤ 1, F

Y

(y) = 1 for all y ≥ 1. Finally, for 0 < y < 1,

F

Y

(y) = P [Y ≤ y] = P [X ≤ y] = F

X

(y) . (4)

Using the CDF F

X

(x), the complete expression for the CDF of Y is

−1 0 1 2 3

0

0.5

1

y

F

Y

(

y

)

F

Y

(y) =

⎧

⎨

⎩

0 y < 0,

y − y

2

/4 0 ≤ y < 1,

1 y ≥ 1.

(5)

As expected, we see that the jump in F

Y

(y) at y = 1 is exactly equal to P[Y = 1].

(4) By taking the derivative of F

Y

(y), we obtain the PDF f

Y

(y). Note that when y < 0

or y > 1, the PDF is zero.

−1 0 1 2 3

0

0.5

1

1.5

y

f

Y

(

y

)

0.25

f

Y

(y) =

_

1 − y/2 +(1/4)δ(y −1) 0 ≤ y ≤ 1

0 otherwise

(6)

Quiz 3.8

(1) P[Y ≤ 6] =

_

6

−∞

f

Y

(y) dy =

_

6

0

(1/10) dy = 0.6 .

19

(2) From Deﬁnition 3.15, the conditional PDF of Y given Y ≤ 6 is

f

Y|Y≤6

(y) =

_

f

Y

(y)

P[Y≤6]

y ≤ 6,

0 otherwise,

=

_

1/6 0 ≤ y ≤ 6,

0 otherwise.

(1)

(3) The probability Y > 8 is

P [Y > 8] =

_

10

8

1

10

dy = 0.2 . (2)

(4) From Deﬁnition 3.15, the conditional PDF of Y given Y > 8 is

f

Y|Y>8

(y) =

_

f

Y

(y)

P[Y>8]

y > 8,

0 otherwise,

=

_

1/2 8 < y ≤ 10,

0 otherwise.

(3)

(5) From the conditional PDF f

Y|Y≤6

(y), we can calculate the conditional expectation

E [Y|Y ≤ 6] =

_

∞

−∞

y f

Y|Y≤6

(y) dy =

_

6

0

y

6

dy = 3. (4)

(6) From the conditional PDF f

Y|Y>8

(y), we can calculate the conditional expectation

E [Y|Y > 8] =

_

∞

−∞

y f

Y|Y>8

(y) dy =

_

10

8

y

2

dy = 9. (5)

Quiz 3.9

A natural way to produce random variables with PDF f

T|T>2

(t ) is to generate samples

of T with PDF f

T

(t ) and then to discard those samples which fail to satisfy the condition

T > 2. Here is a MATLAB function that uses this method:

function t=t2rv(m)

i=0;lambda=1/3;

t=zeros(m,1);

while (i<m),

x=exponentialrv(lambda,1);

if (x>2)

t(i+1)=x;

i=i+1;

end

end

A second method exploits the fact that if T is an exponential (λ) random variable, then

T

= T +2 has PDF f

T

(t ) = f

T|T>2

(t ). In this case the command

t=2.0+exponentialrv(1/3,m)

generates the vector t.

20

Quiz Solutions – Chapter 4

Quiz 4.1

Each value of the joint CDF can be found by considering the corresponding probability.

(1) F

X,Y

(−∞, 2) = P[X ≤ −∞, Y ≤ 2] ≤ P[X ≤ −∞] = 0 since X cannot take on

the value −∞.

(2) F

X,Y

(∞, ∞) = P[X ≤ ∞, Y ≤ ∞] = 1. This result is given in Theorem 4.1.

(3) F

X,Y

(∞, y) = P[X ≤ ∞, Y ≤ y] = P[Y ≤ y] = F

Y

(y).

(4) F

X,Y

(∞, −∞) = P[X ≤ ∞, Y ≤ −∞] = 0 since Y cannot take on the value −∞.

Quiz 4.2

From the joint PMF of Q and G given in the table, we can calculate the requested

probabilities by summing the PMF over those values of Q and G that correspond to the

event.

(1) The probability that Q = 0 is

P [Q = 0] = P

Q,G

(0, 0) + P

Q,G

(0, 1) + P

Q,G

(0, 2) + P

Q,G

(0, 3) (1)

= 0.06 +0.18 +0.24 +0.12 = 0.6 (2)

(2) The probability that Q = G is

P [Q = G] = P

Q,G

(0, 0) + P

Q,G

(1, 1) = 0.18 (3)

(3) The probability that G > 1 is

P [G > 1] =

3

g=2

1

q=0

P

Q,G

(q, g) (4)

= 0.24 +0.16 +0.12 +0.08 = 0.6 (5)

(4) The probability that G > Q is

P [G > Q] =

1

q=0

3

g=q+1

P

Q,G

(q, g) (6)

= 0.18 +0.24 +0.12 +0.16 +0.08 = 0.78 (7)

21

Quiz 4.3

By Theorem 4.3, the marginal PMF of H is

P

H

(h) =

b=0,2,4

P

H,B

(h, b) (1)

For each value of h, this corresponds to calculating the row sum across the table of the joint

PMF. Similarly, the marginal PMF of B is

P

B

(b) =

1

h=−1

P

H,B

(h, b) (2)

For each value of b, this corresponds to the column sum down the table of the joint PMF.

The easiest way to calculate these marginal PMFs is to simply sum each row and column:

P

H,B

(h, b) b = 0 b = 2 b = 4 P

H

(h)

h = −1 0 0.4 0.2 0.6

h = 0 0.1 0 0.1 0.2

h = 1 0.1 0.1 0 0.2

P

B

(b) 0.2 0.5 0.3

(3)

Quiz 4.4

To ﬁnd the constant c, we apply

_

∞

−∞

_

∞

−∞

f

X,Y

(x, y) dx dy = 1. Speciﬁcally,

_

∞

−∞

_

∞

−∞

f

X,Y

(x, y) dx dy =

_

2

0

_

1

0

cxy dx dy (1)

= c

_

2

0

y

_

x

2

/2

¸

¸

¸

1

0

_

dy (2)

= (c/2)

_

2

0

y dy = (c/4)y

2

¸

¸

¸

2

0

= c (3)

Thus c = 1. To calculate P[A], we write

P [A] =

__

A

f

X,Y

(x, y) dx dy (4)

To integrate over A, we convert to polar coordinates using the substitutions x = r cos θ,

y = r sin θ and dx dy = r dr dθ, yielding

Y

X

1

1

2

A

P [A] =

_

π/2

0

_

1

0

r

2

sin θ cos θ r dr dθ (5)

=

_

_

1

0

r

3

dr

__

_

π/2

0

sin θ cos θ dθ

_

(6)

=

_

r

4

/4

¸

¸

¸

1

0

_

⎛

⎝

sin

2

θ

2

¸

¸

¸

¸

¸

π/2

0

⎞

⎠

= 1/8 (7)

22

Quiz 4.5

By Theorem 4.8, the marginal PDF of X is

f

X

(x) =

_

∞

−∞

f

X,Y

(x, y) dy (1)

For x < 0 or x > 1, f

X

(x) = 0. For 0 ≤ x ≤ 1,

f

X

(x) =

6

5

_

1

0

(x + y

2

) dy =

6

5

_

xy + y

3

/3

_¸

¸

¸

y=1

y=0

=

6

5

(x +1/3) =

6x +2

5

(2)

The complete expression for the PDf of X is

f

X

(x) =

_

(6x +2)/5 0 ≤ x ≤ 1

0 otherwise

(3)

By the same method we obtain the marginal PDF for Y. For 0 ≤ y ≤ 1,

f

Y

(y) =

_

∞

−∞

f

X,Y

(x, y) dy (4)

=

6

5

_

1

0

(x + y

2

) dx =

6

5

_

x

2

/2 + xy

2

_¸

¸

¸

x=1

x=0

=

6

5

(1/2 + y

2

) =

3 +6y

2

5

(5)

Since f

Y

(y) = 0 for y < 0 or y > 1, the complete expression for the PDF of Y is

f

Y

(y) =

_

(3 +6y

2

)/5 0 ≤ y ≤ 1

0 otherwise

(6)

Quiz 4.6

(A) The time required for the transfer is T = L/B. For each pair of values of L and B,

we can calculate the time T needed for the transfer. We can write these down on the

table for the joint PMF of L and B as follows:

P

L,B

(l, b) b = 14, 400 b = 21, 600 b = 28, 800

l = 518, 400 0.20 (T=36) 0.10 (T=24) 0.05 (T=18)

l = 2, 592, 000 0.05 (T=180) 0.10 (T=120) 0.20 (T=90)

l = 7, 776, 000 0.00 (T=540) 0.10 (T=360) 0.20 (T=270)

From the table, writing down the PMF of T is straightforward.

P

T

(t ) =

⎧

⎪

⎪

⎪

⎪

⎪

⎪

⎪

⎪

⎪

⎪

⎨

⎪

⎪

⎪

⎪

⎪

⎪

⎪

⎪

⎪

⎪

⎩

0.05 t = 18

0.1 t = 24

0.2 t = 36, 90

0.1 t = 120

0.05 t = 180

0.2 t = 270

0.1 t = 360

0 otherwise

(1)

23

(B) First, we observe that since 0 ≤ X ≤ 1 and 0 ≤ Y ≤ 1, W = XY satisﬁes

0 ≤ W ≤ 1. Thus f

W

(0) = 0 and f

W

(1) = 1. For 0 < w < 1, we calculate the

CDF F

W

(w) = P[W ≤ w]. As shown below, integrating over the region W ≤ w

is fairly complex. The calculus is simpler if we integrate over the region XY > w.

Speciﬁcally,

Y

X

1

1

XY > w

w

w

XY = w

F

W

(w) = 1 − P [XY > w] (2)

= 1 −

_

1

w

_

1

w/x

dy dx (3)

= 1 −

_

1

w

(1 −w/x) dx (4)

= 1 −

_

x −wln x|

x=1

x=w

_

(5)

= 1 −(1 −w +wln w) = w −wln w (6)

The complete expression for the CDF is

F

W

(w) =

⎧

⎨

⎩

0 w < 0

w −wln w 0 ≤ w ≤ 1

1 w > 1

(7)

By taking the derivative of the CDF, we ﬁnd the PDF is

f

W

(w) =

d F

W

(w)

dw

=

⎧

⎨

⎩

0 w < 0

−ln w 0 ≤ w ≤ 1

0 w > 1

(8)

Quiz 4.7

(A) It is helpful to ﬁrst make a table that includes the marginal PMFs.

P

L,T

(l, t ) t = 40 t = 60 P

L

(l)

l = 1 0.15 0.1 0.25

l = 2 0.3 0.2 0.5

l = 3 0.15 0.1 0.25

P

T

(t ) 0.6 0.4

(1) The expected value of L is

E [L] = 1(0.25) +2(0.5) +3(0.25) = 2. (1)

Since the second moment of L is

E

_

L

2

_

= 1

2

(0.25) +2

2

(0.5) +3

2

(0.25) = 4.5, (2)

the variance of L is

Var [L] = E

_

L

2

_

−(E [L])

2

= 0.5. (3)

24

(2) The expected value of T is

E [T] = 40(0.6) +60(0.4) = 48. (4)

The second moment of T is

E

_

T

2

_

= 40

2

(0.6) +60

2

(0.4) = 2400. (5)

Thus

Var[T] = E

_

T

2

_

−(E [T])

2

= 2400 −48

2

= 96. (6)

(3) The correlation is

E [LT] =

t =40,60

3

l=1

lt P

LT

(lt ) (7)

= 1(40)(0.15) +2(40)(0.3) +3(40)(0.15) (8)

+1(60)(0.1) +2(60)(0.2) +3(60)(0.1) (9)

= 96 (10)

(4) From Theorem 4.16(a), the covariance of L and T is

Cov [L, T] = E [LT] − E [L] E [T] = 96 −2(48) = 0 (11)

(5) Since Cov[L, T] = 0, the correlation coefﬁcient is ρ

L,T

= 0.

(B) As in the discrete case, the calculations become easier if we ﬁrst calculate the marginal

PDFs f

X

(x) and f

Y

(y). For 0 ≤ x ≤ 1,

f

X

(x) =

_

∞

−∞

f

X,Y

(x, y) dy =

_

2

0

xy dy =

1

2

xy

2

¸

¸

¸

¸

y=2

y=0

= 2x (12)

Similarly, for 0 ≤ y ≤ 2,

f

Y

(y) =

_

∞

−∞

f

X,Y

(x, y) dx =

_

2

0

xy dx =

1

2

x

2

y

¸

¸

¸

¸

x=1

x=0

=

y

2

(13)

The complete expressions for the marginal PDFs are

f

X

(x) =

_

2x 0 ≤ x ≤ 1

0 otherwise

f

Y

(y) =

_

y/2 0 ≤ y ≤ 2

0 otherwise

(14)

From the marginal PDFs, it is straightforward to calculate the various expectations.

25

(1) The ﬁrst and second moments of X are

E [X] =

_

∞

−∞

x f

X

(x) dx =

_

1

0

2x

2

dx =

2

3

(15)

E

_

X

2

_

=

_

∞

−∞

x

2

f

X

(x) dx =

_

1

0

2x

3

dx =

1

2

(16)

(17)

The variance of X is Var[X] = E[X

2

] −(E[X])

2

= 1/18.

(2) The ﬁrst and second moments of Y are

E [Y] =

_

∞

−∞

y f

Y

(y) dy =

_

2

0

1

2

y

2

dy =

4

3

(18)

E

_

Y

2

_

=

_

∞

−∞

y

2

f

Y

(y) dy =

_

2

0

1

2

y

3

dy = 2 (19)

The variance of Y is Var[Y] = E[Y

2

] −(E[Y])

2

= 2 −16/9 = 2/9.

(3) The correlation of X and Y is

E [XY] =

_

∞

−∞

_

∞

−∞

xy f

X,Y

(x, y) dx, dy (20)

=

_

1

0

_

2

0

x

2

y

2

dx, dy =

x

3

3

¸

¸

¸

¸

1

0

y

3

3

¸

¸

¸

¸

2

0

=

8

9

(21)

(4) The covariance of X and Y is

Cov [X, Y] = E [XY] − E [X] E [Y] =

8

9

−

_

2

3

__

4

3

_

= 0. (22)

(5) Since Cov[X, Y] = 0, the correlation coefﬁcient is ρ

X,Y

= 0.

Quiz 4.8

(A) Since the event V > 80 occurs only for the pairs (L, T) = (2, 60), (L, T) = (3, 40)

and (L, T) = (3, 60),

P [A] = P [V > 80] = P

L,T

(2, 60) + P

L,T

(3, 40) + P

L,T

(3, 60) = 0.45 (1)

By Deﬁnition 4.9,

P

L,T| A

(l, t ) =

_

P

L,T

(l,t )

P[A]

lt > 80

0 otherwise

(2)

26

We can represent this conditional PMF in the following table:

P

L,T| A

(l, t ) t = 40 t = 60

l = 1 0 0

l = 2 0 4/9

l = 3 1/3 2/9

The conditional expectation of V can be found from the conditional PMF.

E [V| A] =

l

t

lt P

L,T| A

(l, t ) (3)

= (2 · 60)

4

9

+(3 · 40)

1

3

+(3 · 60)

2

9

= 133

1

3

(4)

For the conditional variance Var[V| A], we ﬁrst ﬁnd the conditional second moment

E

_

V

2

| A

_

=

l

t

(lt )

2

P

L,T| A

(l, t ) (5)

= (2 · 60)

2

4

9

+(3 · 40)

2

1

3

+(3 · 60)

2

2

9

= 18, 400 (6)

It follows that

Var [V| A] = E

_

V

2

| A

_

−(E [V| A])

2

= 622

2

9

(7)

(B) For continuous random variables X and Y, we ﬁrst calculate the probability of the

conditioning event.

P [B] =

__

B

f

X,Y

(x, y) dx dy =

_

60

40

_

3

80/y

xy

4000

dx dy (8)

=

_

60

40

y

4000

_

x

2

2

¸

¸

¸

¸

3

80/y

_

dy (9)

=

_

60

40

y

4000

_

9

2

−

3200

y

2

_

dy (10)

=

9

8

−

4

5

ln

3

2

≈ 0.801 (11)

The conditional PDF of X and Y is

f

X,Y|B

(x, y) =

_

f

X,Y

(x, y) /P [B] (x, y) ∈ B

0 otherwise

(12)

=

_

Kxy 40 ≤ y ≤ 60, 80/y ≤ x ≤ 3

0 otherwise

(13)

27

where K = (4000P[B])

−1

. The conditional expectation of W given event B is

E [W|B] =

_

∞

−∞

_

∞

−∞

xy f

X,Y|B

(x, y) dx dy (14)

=

_

60

40

_

3

80/y

Kx

2

y

2

dx dy (15)

= (K/3)

_

60

40

y

2

x

3

¸

¸

¸

x=3

x=80/y

dy (16)

= (K/3)

_

60

40

_

27y

2

−80

3

/y

_

dy (17)

= (K/3)

_

9y

3

−80

3

ln y

_¸

¸

¸

60

40

≈ 120.78 (18)

The conditional second moment of K given B is

E

_

W

2

|B

_

=

_

∞

−∞

_

∞

−∞

(xy)

2

f

X,Y|B

(x, y) dx dy (19)

=

_

60

40

_

3

80/y

Kx

3

y

3

dx dy (20)

= (K/4)

_

60

40

y

3

x

4

¸

¸

¸

x=3

x=80/y

dy (21)

= (K/4)

_

60

40

_

81y

3

−80

4

/y

_

dy (22)

= (K/4)

_

(81/4)y

4

−80

4

ln y

_¸

¸

¸

60

40

≈ 16, 116.10 (23)

It follows that the conditional variance of W given B is

Var [W|B] = E

_

W

2

|B

_

−(E [W|B])

2

≈ 1528.30 (24)

Quiz 4.9

(A) (1) The joint PMF of A and B can be found from the marginal and conditional

PMFs via P

A,B

(a, b) = P

B| A

(b|a)P

A

(a). Incorporating the information from

the given conditional PMFs can be confusing, however. Consequently, we can

note that A has range S

A

= {0, 2} and B has range S

B

= {0, 1}. A table of the

joint PMF will include all four possible combinations of A and B. The general

form of the table is

P

A,B

(a, b) b = 0 b = 1

a = 0 P

B| A

(0|0)P

A

(0) P

B| A

(1|0)P

A

(0)

a = 2 P

B| A

(0|2)P

A

(2) P

B| A

(1|2)P

A

(2)

28

Substituting values from P

B| A

(b|a) and P

A

(a), we have

P

A,B

(a, b) b = 0 b = 1

a = 0 (0.8)(0.4) (0.2)(0.4)

a = 2 (0.5)(0.6) (0.5)(0.6)

or

P

A,B

(a, b) b = 0 b = 1

a = 0 0.32 0.08

a = 2 0.3 0.3

(2) Given the conditional PMF P

B| A

(b|2), it is easy to calculate the conditional

expectation

E [B| A = 2] =

1

b=0

bP

B| A

(b|2) = (0)(0.5) +(1)(0.5) = 0.5 (1)

(3) From the joint PMF P

A,B

(a, b), we can calculate the the conditional PMF

P

A|B

(a|0) =

P

A,B

(a, 0)

P

B

(0)

=

⎧

⎨

⎩

0.32/0.62 a = 0

0.3/0.62 a = 2

0 otherwise

(2)

=

⎧

⎨

⎩

16/31 a = 0

15/31 a = 2

0 otherwise

(3)

(4) We can calculate the conditional variance Var[A|B = 0] using the conditional

PMF P

A|B

(a|0). First we calculate the conditional expected value

E [A|B = 0] =

a

aP

A|B

(a|0) = 0(16/31) +2(15/31) = 30/31 (4)

The conditional second moment is

E

_

A

2

|B = 0

_

=

a

a

2

P

A|B

(a|0) = 0

2

(16/31) +2

2

(15/31) = 60/31 (5)

The conditional variance is then

Var[A|B = 0] = E

_

A

2

|B = 0

_

−(E [A|B = 0])

2

=

960

961

(6)

(B) (1) The joint PDF of X and Y is

f

X,Y

(x, y) = f

Y|X

(y|x) f

X

(x) =

_

6y 0 ≤ y ≤ x, 0 ≤ x ≤ 1

0 otherwise

(7)

(2) From the given conditional PDF f

Y|X

(y|x),

f

Y|X

(y|1/2) =

_

8y 0 ≤ y ≤ 1/2

0 otherwise

(8)

29

(3) The conditional PDF of Y given X = 1/2 is f

X|Y

(x|1/2) = f

X,Y

(x, 1/2)/f

Y

(1/2).

To ﬁnd f

Y

(1/2), we integrate the joint PDF.

f

Y

(1/2) =

_

∞

−∞

f

X,1/2

( ) dx =

_

1

1/2

6(1/2) dx = 3/2 (9)

Thus, for 1/2 ≤ x ≤ 1,

f

X|Y

(x|1/2) =

f

X,Y

(x, 1/2)

f

Y

(1/2)

=

6(1/2)

3/2

= 2 (10)

(4) From the pervious part, we see that given Y = 1/2, the conditional PDF of X

is uniform (1/2, 1). Thus, by the deﬁnition of the uniform (a, b) PDF,

Var [X|Y = 1/2] =

(1 −1/2)

2

12

=

1

48

(11)

Quiz 4.10

(A) (1) For random variables X and Y from Example 4.1, we observe that P

Y

(1) =

0.09 and P

X

(0) = 0.01. However,

P

X,Y

(0, 1) = 0 = P

X

(0) P

Y

(1) (1)

Since we have found a pair x, y such that P

X,Y

(x, y) = P

X

(x)P

Y

(y), we can

conclude that X and Y are dependent. Note that whenever P

X,Y

(x, y) = 0,

independence requires that either P

X

(x) = 0 or P

Y

(y) = 0.

(2) For random variables Q and G from Quiz 4.2, it is not obvious whether they

are independent. Unlike X and Y in part (a), there are no obvious pairs q, g

that fail the independence requirement. In this case, we calculate the marginal

PMFs from the table of the joint PMF P

Q,G

(q, g) in Quiz 4.2.

P

Q,G

(q, g) g = 0 g = 1 g = 2 g = 3 P

Q

(q)

q = 0 0.06 0.18 0.24 0.12 0.60

q = 1 0.04 0.12 0.16 0.08 0.40

P

G

(g) 0.10 0.30 0.40 0.20

Careful study of the table will verify that P

Q,G

(q, g) = P

Q

(q)P

G

(g) for every

pair q, g. Hence Q and G are independent.

(B) (1) Since X

1

and X

2

are independent,

f

X

1

,X

2

(x

1

, x

2

) = f

X

1

(x

1

) f

X

2

(x

2

) (2)

=

_

(1 − x

1

/2)(1 − x

2

/2) 0 ≤ x

1

≤ 2, 0 ≤ x

2

≤ 2

0 otherwise

(3)

30

(2) Let F

X

(x) denote the CDF of both X

1

and X

2

. The CDF of Z = max(X

1

, X

2

)

is found by observing that Z ≤ z iff X

1

≤ z and X

2

≤ z. That is,

P [Z ≤ z] = P [X

1

≤ z, X

2

≤ z] (4)

= P [X

1

≤ z] P [X

2

≤ z] = [F

X

(z)]

2

(5)

To complete the problem, we need to ﬁnd the CDF of each X

i

. From the PDF

f

X

(x), the CDF is

F

X

(x) =

_

x

−∞

f

X

(y) dy =

⎧

⎨

⎩

0 x < 0

x − x

2

/4 0 ≤ x ≤ 2

1 x > 2

(6)

Thus for 0 ≤ z ≤ 2,

F

Z

(z) = (z − z

2

/4)

2

(7)

The complete expression for the CDF of Z is

F

Z

(z) =

⎧

⎨

⎩

0 z < 0

(z − z

2

/4)

2

0 ≤ z ≤ 2

1 z > 1

(8)

Quiz 4.11

This problem just requires identifying the various terms in Deﬁnition 4.17 and Theo-

rem 4.29. Speciﬁcally, from the problem statement, we know that ρ = 1/2,

µ

1

= µ

X

= 0, µ

2

= µ

Y

= 0, (1)

and that

σ

1

= σ

X

= 1, σ

2

= σ

Y

= 1. (2)

(1) Applying these facts to Deﬁnition 4.17, we have

f

X,Y

(x, y) =

1

√

3π

2

e

−2(x

2

−xy+y

2

)/3

. (3)

(2) By Theorem 4.30, the conditional expected value and standard deviation of X given

Y = y are

E [X|Y = y] = y/2 ˜ σ

X

= σ

2

1

(1 −ρ

2

) =

_

3/4. (4)

When Y = y = 2, we see that E[X|Y = 2] = 1 and Var[X|Y = 2] = 3/4. The

conditional PDF of X given Y = 2 is simply the Gaussian PDF

f

X|Y

(x|2) =

1

√

3π/2

e

−2(x−1)

2

/3

. (5)

31

Quiz 4.12

One straightforward method is to follow the approach of Example 4.28. Instead, we use

an alternate approach. First we observe that X has the discrete uniform (1, 4) PMF. Also,

given X = x, Y has a discrete uniform (1, x) PMF. That is,

P

X

(x) =

_

1/4 x = 1, 2, 3, 4,

0 otherwise,

P

Y|X

(y|x) =

_

1/x y = 1, . . . , x

0 otherwise

(1)

Given X = x, and an independent uniform (0, 1) random variable U, we can generate a

sample value of Y with a discrete uniform (1, x) PMF via Y = xU. This observation

prompts the following program:

function xy=dtrianglerv(m)

sx=[1;2;3;4];

px=0.25*ones(4,1);

x=finiterv(sx,px,m);

y=ceil(x.*rand(m,1));

xy=[x’;y’];

32

Quiz Solutions – Chapter 5

Quiz 5.1

We ﬁnd P[C] by integrating the joint PDF over the region of interest. Speciﬁcally,

P [C] =

_

1/2

0

dy

2

_

y

2

0

dy

1

_

1/2

0

dy

4

_

y

4

0

4dy

3

(1)

= 4

_

_

1/2

0

y

2

dy

2

__

_

1/2

0

y

4

dy

4

_

= 1/4. (2)

Quiz 5.2

By deﬁnition of A, Y

1

= X

1

, Y

2

= X

2

−X

1

and Y

3

= X

3

−X

2

. Since 0 < X

1

< X

2

<

X

3

, each Y

i

must be a strictly positive integer. Thus, for y

1

, y

2

, y

3

∈ {1, 2, . . .},

P

Y

(y) = P [Y

1

= y

1

, Y

2

= y

2

, Y

3

= y

3

] (1)

= P [X

1

= y

1

, X

2

− X

1

= y

2

, X

3

− X

2

= y

3

] (2)

= P [X

1

= y

1

, X

2

= y

2

+ y

1

, X

3

= y

3

+ y

2

+ y

1

] (3)

= (1 − p)

3

p

y

1

+y

2

+y

3

(4)

By deﬁning the vector a =

_

1 1 1

_

**, the complete expression for the joint PMF of Y is
**

P

Y

(y) =

_

(1 − p) p

a

y

y

1

, y

2

, y

3

∈ {1, 2, . . .}

0 otherwise

(5)

Quiz 5.3

First we note that each marginal PDF is nonzero only if any subset of the x

i

obeys the

ordering contraints 0 ≤ x

1

≤ x

2

≤ x

3

≤ 1. Within these constraints, we have

f

X

1

,X

2

(x

1

, x

2

) =

_

∞

−∞

f

X

(x) dx

3

=

_

1

x

2

6 dx

3

= 6(1 − x

2

), (1)

f

X

2

,X

3

(x

2

, x

3

) =

_

∞

−∞

f

X

(x) dx

1

=

_

x

2

0

6 dx

1

= 6x

2

, (2)

f

X

1

,X

3

(x

1

, x

3

) =

_

∞

−∞

f

X

(x) dx

2

=

_

x

3

x

1

6 dx

2

= 6(x

3

− x

1

). (3)

In particular, we must keep in mind that f

X

1

,X

2

(x

1

, x

2

) = 0 unless 0 ≤ x

1

≤ x

2

≤ 1,

f

X

2

,X

3

(x

2

, x

3

) = 0 unless 0 ≤ x

2

≤ x

3

≤ 1, and that f

X

1

,X

3

(x

1

, x

3

) = 0 unless 0 ≤ x

1

≤

33

x

3

≤ 1. The complete expressions are

f

X

1

,X

2

(x

1

, x

2

) =

_

6(1 − x

2

) 0 ≤ x

1

≤ x

2

≤ 1

0 otherwise

(4)

f

X

2

,X

3

(x

2

, x

3

) =

_

6x

2

0 ≤ x

2

≤ x

3

≤ 1

0 otherwise

(5)

f

X

1

,X

3

(x

1

, x

3

) =

_

6(x

3

− x

1

) 0 ≤ x

1

≤ x

3

≤ 1

0 otherwise

(6)

Now we can ﬁnd the marginal PDFs. When 0 ≤ x

i

≤ 1 for each x

i

,

f

X

1

(x

1

) =

_

∞

−∞

f

X

1

,X

2

(x

1

, x

2

) dx

2

=

_

1

x

1

6(1 − x

2

) dx

2

= 3(1 − x

1

)

2

(7)

f

X

2

(x

2

) =

_

∞

−∞

f

X

2

,X

3

(x

2

, x

3

) dx

3

=

_

1

x

2

6x

2

dx

3

= 6x

2

(1 − x

2

) (8)

f

X

3

(x

3

) =

_

∞

−∞

f

X

2

,X

3

(x

2

, x

3

) dx

2

=

_

x

3

0

6x

2

dx

2

= 3x

2

3

(9)

The complete expressions are

f

X

1

(x

1

) =

_

3(1 − x

1

)

2

0 ≤ x

1

≤ 1

0 otherwise

(10)

f

X

2

(x

2

) =

_

6x

2

(1 − x

2

) 0 ≤ x

2

≤ 1

0 otherwise

(11)

f

X

3

(x

3

) =

_

3x

2

3

0 ≤ x

3

≤ 1

0 otherwise

(12)

Quiz 5.4

In the PDF f

Y

(y), the components have dependencies as a result of the ordering con-

straints Y

1

≤ Y

2

and Y

3

≤ Y

4

. We can separate these constraints by creating the vectors

V =

_

Y

1

Y

2

_

, W =

_

Y

3

Y

4

_

. (1)

The joint PDF of V and W is

f

V,W

(v, w) =

_

4 0 ≤ v

1

≤ v

2

≤ 1, 0 ≤ w

1

≤ w

2

≤ 1

0 otherwise

(2)

34

We must verify that V and W are independent. For 0 ≤ v

1

≤ v

2

≤ 1,

f

V

(v) =

__

f

V,W

(v, w) dw

1

dw

2

(3)

=

_

1

0

_

_

1

w

1

4 dw

2

_

dw

1

(4)

=

_

1

0

4(1 −w

1

) dw

1

= 2 (5)

Similarly, for 0 ≤ w

1

≤ w

2

≤ 1,

f

W

(w) =

__

f

V,W

(v, w) dv

1

dv

2

(6)

=

_

1

0

_

_

1

v

1

4 dv

2

_

dv

1

= 2 (7)

It follows that V and W have PDFs

f

V

(v) =

_

2 0 ≤ v

1

≤ v

2

≤ 1

0 otherwise

, f

W

(w) =

_

2 0 ≤ w

1

≤ w

2

≤ 1

0 otherwise

(8)

It is easy to verify that f

V,W

(v, w) = f

V

(v) f

W

(w), conﬁrming that V and W are indepen-

dent vectors.

Quiz 5.5

(A) Referring to Theorem 1.19, each test is a subexperiment with three possible out-

comes: L, A and R. In ﬁve trials, the vector X =

_

X

1

X

2

X

3

_

indicating the

number of outcomes of each subexperiment has the multinomial PMF

P

X

(x) =

⎧

⎨

⎩

_

5

x

1

,x

2

,x

3

_

(0.3)

x

1

(0.6)

x

2

(0.1)

x

3

x

1

+ x

2

+ x

3

= 5;

x

1

, x

2

, x

3

∈ {0, 1, . . . , 5}

0 otherwise

(1)

We can ﬁnd the marginal PMF for each X

i

from the joint PMF P

X

(x); however it

is simpler to just start from ﬁrst principles and observe that X

1

is the number of

occurrences of L in ﬁve independent tests. If we view each test as a trial with success

probability P[L] = 0.3, we see that X

1

is a binomial (n, p) = (5, 0.3) random

variable. Similarly, X

2

is a binomial (5, 0.6) random variable and X

3

is a binomial

(5, 0.1) random variable. That is, for p

1

= 0.3, p

2

= 0.6 and p

3

= 0.1,

P

X

i

(x) =

_ _

5

x

_

p

x

i

(1 − p

i

)

5−x

x = 0, 1, . . . , 5

0 otherwise

(2)

35

From the marginal PMFs, we see that X

1

, X

2

and X

3

are not independent. Hence, we

must use Theorem 5.6 to ﬁnd the PMF of W. In particular, since X

1

+ X

2

+ X

3

= 5

and since each X

i

is non-negative, P

W

(0) = P

W

(1) = 0. Furthermore,

P

W

(2) = P

X

(1, 2, 2) + P

X

(2, 1, 2) + P

X

(2, 2, 1) (3)

=

5![0.3(0.6)

2

(0.1)

2

+0.3

2

(0.6)(0.1)

2

+0.3

2

(0.6)

2

(0.1)]

2!2!1!

(4)

= 0.1458 (5)

In addition, for w = 3, w = 4, and w = 5, the event W = w occurs if and only if

one of the mutually exclusive events X

1

= w, X

2

= w, or X

3

= w occurs. Thus,

P

W

(3) = P

X

1

(3) + P

X

2

(3) + P

X

3

(3) = 0.486 (6)

P

W

(4) = P

X

1

(4) + P

X

2

(4) + P

X

3

(4) = 0.288 (7)

P

W

(5) = P

X

1

(5) + P

X

2

(5) + P

X

3

(5) = 0.0802 (8)

(B) Since each Y

i

= 2X

i

+4, we can apply Theorem 5.10 to write

f

Y

(y) =

1

2

3

f

X

_

y

1

−4

2

,

y

2

−4

2

,

y

3

−4

2

_

(9)

=

_

(1/8)e

−(y

3

−4)/2

4 ≤ y

1

≤ y

2

≤ y

3

0 otherwise

(10)

Note that for other matrices A, the constraints on y resulting from the constraints

0 ≤ X

1

≤ X

2

≤ X

3

can be much more complicated.

Quiz 5.6

We start by ﬁnding the components E[X

i

] =

_

∞

−∞

x f

X

i

(x) dx of µ

X

. To do so, we use

the marginal PDFs f

X

i

(x) found in Quiz 5.3:

E [X

1

] =

_

1

0

3x(1 − x)

2

dx = 1/4, (1)

E [X

2

] =

_

1

0

6x

2

(1 − x) dx = 1/2, (2)

E [X

3

] =

_

1

0

3x

3

dx = 3/4. (3)

To ﬁnd the correlation matrix R

X

, we need to ﬁnd E[X

i

X

j

] for all i and j . We start with

36

the second moments:

E

_

X

2

1

_

=

_

1

0

3x

2

(1 − x)

2

dx = 1/10. (4)

E

_

X

2

2

_

=

_

1

0

6x

3

(1 − x) dx = 3/10. (5)

E

_

X

2

3

_

=

_

1

0

3x

4

dx = 3/5. (6)

Using marginal PDFs from Quiz 5.3, the cross terms are

E [X

1

X

2

] =

_

∞

−∞

_

∞

−∞

x

1

x

2

f

X

1

,X

2

(x

1

, x

2

) , dx

1

dx

2

(7)

=

_

1

0

_

_

1

x

1

6x

1

x

2

(1 − x

2

) dx

2

_

dx

1

(8)

=

_

1

0

[x

1

−3x

3

1

+2x

4

1

] dx

1

= 3/20. (9)

E [X

2

X

3

] =

_

1

0

_

1

x

2

6x

2

2

x

3

dx

3

dx

2

(10)

=

_

1

0

[3x

2

2

−3x

4

2

] dx

2

= 2/5 (11)

E [X

1

X

3

] =

_

1

0

_

1

x

1

6x

1

x

3

(x

3

− x

1

) dx

3

dx

1

. (12)

=

_

1

0

_

(2x

1

x

3

3

−3x

2

1

x

2

3

)

¸

¸

¸

x

3

=1

x

3

=x

1

_

dx

1

(13)

=

_

1

0

[2x

1

−3x

2

1

+ x

4

1

] dx

1

= 1/5. (14)

Summarizing the results, X has correlation matrix

R

X

=

⎡

⎣

1/10 3/20 1/5

3/20 3/10 2/5

1/5 2/5 3/5

⎤

⎦

. (15)

Vector X has covariance matrix

C

X

= R

X

− E [X] E [X]

(16)

=

⎡

⎣

1/10 3/20 1/5

3/20 3/10 2/5

1/5 2/5 3/5

⎤

⎦

−

⎡

⎣

1/4

1/2

3/4

⎤

⎦

_

1/4 1/2 3/4

_

(17)

=

⎡

⎣

1/10 3/20 1/5

3/20 3/10 2/5

1/5 2/5 3/5

⎤

⎦

−

⎡

⎣

1/16 1/8 3/16

1/8 1/4 3/8

3/16 3/8 9/16

⎤

⎦

=

1

80

⎡

⎣

3 2 1

2 4 2

1 2 3

⎤

⎦

. (18)

37

This problemshows that even for fairly simple joint PDFs, computing the covariance matrix

by calculus can be a time consuming task.

Quiz 5.7

We observe that X = AZ +b where

A =

_

2 1

1 −1

_

, b =

_

2

0

_

. (1)

It follows from Theorem 5.18 that µ

X

= b and that

C

X

= AA

=

_

2 1

1 −1

_ _

2 1

1 −1

_

=

_

5 1

1 2

_

. (2)

Quiz 5.8

First, we observe that Y = AT where A =

_

1/31 1/31 · · · 1/31

_

. Since T is a

Gaussian random vector, Theorem 5.16 tells us that Y is a 1 dimensional Gaussian vector,

i.e., just a Gaussian random variable. The expected value of Y is µ

Y

= µ

T

= 80. The

covariance matrix of Y is 1 × 1 and is just equal to Var[Y]. Thus, by Theorem 5.16,

Var[Y] = AC

T

A

.

function p=julytemps(T);

[D1 D2]=ndgrid((1:31),(1:31));

CT=36./(1+abs(D1-D2));

A=ones(31,1)/31.0;

CY=(A’)*CT*A;

p=phi((T-80)/sqrt(CY));

In julytemps.m, the ﬁrst two lines gen-

erate the 31 ×31 covariance matrix CT, or

C

T

. Next we calculate Var[Y]. The ﬁnal

step is to use the (·) function to calculate

P[Y < T].

Here is the output of julytemps.m:

>> julytemps([70 75 80 85 90 95])

ans =

0.0000 0.0221 0.5000 0.9779 1.0000 1.0000

Note that P[T ≤ 70] is not actually zero and that P[T ≤ 90] is not actually 1.0000. Its

just that the MATLAB’s short format output, invoked with the command format short,

rounds off those probabilities. Here is the long format output:

>> format long

>> julytemps([70 75 80 85 90 95])

ans =

Columns 1 through 4

0.00002844263128 0.02207383067604 0.50000000000000 0.97792616932396

Columns 5 through 6

0.99997155736872 0.99999999922010

38

The ndgrid function is a useful to way calculate many covariance matrices. However, in

this problem, C

X

has a special structure; the i, j th element is

C

T

(i, j ) = c

|i −j |

=

36

1 +|i − j |

. (1)

If we write out the elements of the covariance matrix, we see that

C

T

=

⎡

⎢

⎢

⎢

⎣

c

0

c

1

· · · c

30

c

1

c

0

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

. c

1

c

30

· · · c

1

c

0

⎤

⎥

⎥

⎥

⎦

. (2)

This covariance matrix is known as a symmetric Toeplitz matrix. We will see in Chap-

ters 9 and 11 that Toeplitz covariance matrices are quite common. In fact, MATLAB has a

toeplitz function for generating them. The function julytemps2 use the toeplitz

to generate the correlation matrix C

T

.

function p=julytemps2(T);

c=36./(1+abs(0:30));

CT=toeplitz(c);

A=ones(31,1)/31.0;

CY=(A’)*CT*A;

p=phi((T-80)/sqrt(CY));

39

Quiz Solutions – Chapter 6

Quiz 6.1

Let K

1

, . . . , K

n

denote a sequence of iid random variables each with PMF

P

K

(k) =

_

1/4 k = 1, . . . , 4

0 otherwise

(1)

We can write W

n

in the form of W

n

= K

1

+ · · · + K

n

. First, we note that the ﬁrst two

moments of K

i

are

E [K

i

] = (1 +2 +3 +4)/4 = 2.5 (2)

E

_

K

2

i

_

= (1

2

+2

2

+3

2

+4

2

)/4 = 7.5 (3)

Thus the variance of K

i

is

Var[K

i

] = E

_

K

2

i

_

−(E [K

i

])

2

= 7.5 −(2.5)

2

= 1.25 (4)

Since E[K

i

] = 2.5, the expected value of W

n

is

E [W

n

] = E [K

1

] +· · · + E [K

n

] = nE [K

i

] = 2.5n (5)

Since the rolls are independent, the random variables K

1

, . . . , K

n

are independent. Hence,

by Theorem 6.3, the variance of the sum equals the sum of the variances. That is,

Var[W

n

] = Var[K

1

] +· · · +Var[K

n

] = 1.25n (6)

Quiz 6.2

Random variables X and Y have PDFs

f

X

(x) =

_

3e

−3x

x ≥ 0

0 otherwise

f

Y

(y) =

_

2e

−2y

y ≥ 0

0 otherwise

(1)

Since X and Y are nonnegative, W = X +Y is nonnegative. By Theorem 6.5, the PDF of

W = X +Y is

f

W

(w) =

_

∞

−∞

f

X

(w − y) f

Y

(y) dy = 6

_

w

0

e

−3(w−y)

e

−2y

dy (2)

Fortunately, this integral is easy to evaluate. For w > 0,

f

W

(w) = e

−3w

e

y

¸

¸

w

0

= 6

_

e

−2w

−e

−3w

_

(3)

Since f

W

(w) = 0 for w < 0, a conmplete expression for the PDF of W is

f

W

(w) =

_

6e

−2w

_

1 −e

−w

_

w ≥ 0,

0 otherwise.

(4)

40

Quiz 6.3

The MGF of K is

φ

K

(s) = E

_

e

s K

_

==

4

k=0

(0.2)e

sk

= 0.2

_

1 +e

s

+e

2s

+e

3s

+e

4s

_

(1)

We ﬁnd the moments by taking derivatives. The ﬁrst derivative of φ

K

(s) is

dφ

K

(s)

ds

= 0.2(e

s

+2e

2s

+3e

3s

+4e

4s

) (2)

Evaluating the derivative at s = 0 yields

E [K] =

dφ

K

(s)

ds

¸

¸

¸

¸

s=0

= 0.2(1 +2 +3 +4) = 2 (3)

To ﬁnd higher-order moments, we continue to take derivatives:

E

_

K

2

_

=

d

2

φ

K

(s)

ds

2

¸

¸

¸

¸

s=0

= 0.2(e

s

+4e

2s

+9e

3s

+16e

4s

)

¸

¸

¸

s=0

= 6 (4)

E

_

K

3

_

=

d

3

φ

K

(s)

ds

3

¸

¸

¸

¸

s=0

= 0.2(e

s

+8e

2s

+27e

3s

+64e

4s

)

¸

¸

¸

s=0

= 20 (5)

E

_

K

4

_

=

d

4

φ

K

(s)

ds

4

¸

¸

¸

¸

s=0

= 0.2(e

s

+16e

2s

+81e

3s

+256e

4s

)

¸

¸

¸

s=0

= 70.8 (6)

(7)

Quiz 6.4

(A) Each K

i

has MGF

φ

K

(s) = E

_

e

s K

i

_

=

e

s

+e

2s

+· · · +e

ns

n

=

e

s

(1 −e

ns

)

n(1 −e

s

)

(1)

Since the sequence of K

i

is independent, Theorem 6.8 says the MGF of J is

φ

J

(s) = (φ

K

(s))

m

=

e

ms

(1 −e

ns

)

m

n

m

(1 −e

s

)

m

(2)

(B) Since the set of α

j

X

j

are independent Gaussian random variables, Theorem 6.10

says that W is a Gaussian random variable. Thus to ﬁnd the PDF of W, we need

only ﬁnd the expected value and variance. Since the expectation of the sum equals

the sum of the expectations:

E [W] = αE [X

1

] +α

2

E [X

2

] +· · · +α

n

E [X

n

] = 0 (3)

41

Since the α

j

X

j

are independent, the variance of the sum equals the sum of the vari-

ances:

Var[W] = α

2

Var[X

1

] +α

4

Var[X

2

] +· · · +α

2n

Var[X

n

] (4)

= α

2

+2(α

2

)

2

+3(α

2

)

3

+· · · +n(α

2

)

n

(5)

Deﬁning q = α

2

, we can use Math Fact B.6 to write

Var[W] =

α

2

−α

2n+2

[1 +n(1 −α

2

)]

(1 −α

2

)

2

(6)

With E[W] = 0 and σ

2

W

= Var[W], we can write the PDF of W as

f

W

(w) =

1

_

2πσ

2

W

e

−w

2

/2σ

2

W

(7)

Quiz 6.5

(1) From Table 6.1, each X

i

has MGF φ

X

(s) and random variable N has MGF φ

N

(s)

where

φ

X

(s) =

1

1 −s

, φ

N

(s) =

1

5

e

s

1 −

4

5

e

s

. (1)

From Theorem 6.12, R has MGF

φ

R

(s) = φ

N

(ln φ

X

(s)) =

1

5

φ

X

(s)

1 −

4

5

φ

X

(s)

(2)

Substituting the expression for φ

X

(s) yields

φ

R

(s) =

1

5

1

5

−s

. (3)

(2) From Table 6.1, we see that R has the MGF of an exponential (1/5) random variable.

The corresponding PDF is

f

R

(r) =

_

(1/5)e

−r/5

r ≥ 0

0 otherwise

(4)

This quiz is an example of the general result that a geometric sum of exponential

random variables is an exponential random variable.

42

Quiz 6.6

(1) The expected access time is

E [X] =

_

∞

−∞

x f

X

(x) dx =

_

12

0

x

12

dx = 6 msec (1)

(2) The second moment of the access time is

E

_

X

2

_

=

_

∞

−∞

x

2

f

X

(x) dx =

_

12

0

x

2

12

dx = 48 (2)

The variance of the access time is Var[X] = E[X

2

] −(E[X])

2

= 48 −36 = 12.

(3) Using X

i

to denote the access time of block i , we can write

A = X

1

+ X

2

+· · · + X

12

(3)

Since the expectation of the sum equals the sum of the expectations,

E [A] = E [X

1

] +· · · + E [X

12

] = 12E [X] = 72 msec (4)

(4) Since the X

i

are independent,

Var[A] = Var[X

1

] +· · · +Var[X

12

] = 12 Var[X] = 144 (5)

Hence, the standard deviation of A is σ

A

= 12

(5) To use the central limit theorem, we write

P [A > 75] = 1 − P [A ≤ 75] (6)

= 1 − P

_

A − E [A]

σ

A

≤

75 − E [A]

σ

A

_

(7)

≈ 1 −

_

75 −72

12

_

(8)

= 1 −0.5987 = 0.4013 (9)

Note that we used Table 3.1 to look up (0.25).

(6) Once again, we use the central limit theorem and Table 3.1 to estimate

P [A < 48] = P

_

A − E [A]

σ

A

<

48 − E [A]

σ

A

_

(10)

≈

_

48 −72

12

_

(11)

= 1 −(2) = 1 −0.9773 = 0.0227 (12)

43

Quiz 6.7

Random variable K

n

has a binomial distribution for n trials and success probability

P[V] = 3/4.

(1) The expected number of voice calls out of 48 calls is E[K

48

] = 48P[V] = 36.

(2) The variance of K

48

is

Var[K

48

] = 48P [V] (1 − P [V]) = 48(3/4)(1/4) = 9 (1)

Thus K

48

has standard deviation σ

K

48

= 3.

(3) Using the ordinary central limit theorem and Table 3.1 yields

P [30 ≤ K

48

≤ 42] ≈

_

42 −36

3

_

−

_

30 −36

3

_

= (2) −(−2) (2)

Recalling that (−x) = 1 −(x), we have

P [30 ≤ K

48

≤ 42] ≈ 2(2) −1 = 0.9545 (3)

(4) Since K

48

is a discrete random variable, we can use the De Moivre-Laplace approx-

imation to estimate

P [30 ≤ K

48

≤ 42] ≈

_

42 +0.5 −36

3

_

−

_

30 −0.5 −36

3

_

(4)

= 2(2.16666) −1 = 0.9687 (5)

Quiz 6.8

The train interarrival times X

1

, X

2

, X

3

are iid exponential (λ) random variables. The

arrival time of the third train is

W = X

1

+ X

2

+ X

3

. (1)

In Theorem 6.11, we found that the sum of three iid exponential (λ) random variables is an

Erlang (n = 3, λ) random variable. From Appendix A, we ﬁnd that W has expected value

and variance

E [W] = 3/λ = 6 Var[W] = 3/λ

2

= 12 (2)

(1) By the Central Limit Theorem,

P [W > 20] = P

_

W −6

√

12

>

20 −6

√

12

_

≈ Q(7/

√

3) = 2.66 ×10

−5

(3)

44

(2) To use the Chernoff bound, we note that the MGF of W is

φ

W

(s) =

_

λ

λ −s

_

3

=

1

(1 −2s)

3

(4)

The Chernoff bound states that

P [W > 20] ≤ min

s≥0

e

−20s

φ

X

(s) = min

s≥0

e

−20s

(1 −2s)

3

(5)

To minimize h(s) = e

−20s

/(1 −2s)

3

, we set the derivative of h(s) to zero:

dh(s)

ds

=

−20(1 −2s)

3

e

−20s

+6e

−20s

(1 −2s)

2

(1 −2s)

6

= 0 (6)

This implies 20(1 − 2s) = 6 or s = 7/20. Applying s = 7/20 into the Chernoff

bound yields

P [W > 20] ≤

e

−20s

(1 −2s)

3

¸

¸

¸

¸

s=7/20

= (10/3)

3

e

−7

= 0.0338 (7)

(3) Theorem 3.11 says that for any w > 0, the CDF of the Erlang (λ, 3) random variable

W satisﬁes

F

W

(w) = 1 −

2

k=0

(λw)

k

e

−λw

k!

(8)

Equivalently, for λ = 1/2 and w = 20,

P [W > 20] = 1 − F

W

(20) (9)

= e

−10

_

1 +

10

1!

+

10

2

2!

_

= 61e

−10

= 0.0028 (10)

Although the Chernoff bound is relatively weak in that it overestimates the proba-

bility by roughly a factor of 12, it is a valid bound. By contrast, the Central Limit

Theorem approximation grossly underestimates the true probability.

Quiz 6.9

One solution to this problem is to follow the approach of Example 6.19:

%unifbinom100.m

sx=0:100;sy=0:100;

px=binomialpmf(100,0.5,sx); py=duniformpmf(0,100,sy);

[SX,SY]=ndgrid(sx,sy); [PX,PY]=ndgrid(px,py);

SW=SX+SY; PW=PX.*PY;

sw=unique(SW); pw=finitepmf(SW,PW,sw);

pmfplot(sw,pw,’\itw’,’\itP_W(w)’);

A graph of the PMF P

W

(w) appears in Figure 2 With some thought, it should be apparent

that the finitepmf function is implementing the convolution of the two PMFs.

45

0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200

0

0.002

0.004

0.006

0.008

0.01

w

P

W

(

w

)

Figure 2: From Quiz 6.9, the PMF P

W

(w) of the independent sum of a binomial (100, 0.5)

random variable and a discrete uniform (0, 100) random variable.

46

Quiz Solutions – Chapter 7

Quiz 7.1

An exponential random variable with expected value 1 also has variance 1. By Theo-

rem 7.1, M

n

(X) has variance Var[M

n

(X)] = 1/n. Hence, we need n = 100 samples.

Quiz 7.2

The arrival time of the third elevator is W = X

1

+ X

2

+ X

3

. Since each X

i

is uniform

(0, 30),

E [X

i

] = 15, Var [X

i

] =

(30 −0)

2

12

= 75. (1)

Thus E[W] = 3E[X

i

] = 45, and Var[W] = 3 Var[X

i

] = 225.

(1) By the Markov inequality,

P [W > 75] ≤

E [W]

75

=

45

75

=

3

5

(2)

(2) By the Chebyshev inequality,

P [W > 75] = P [W − E [W] > 30] (3)

≤ P [|W − E [W]| > 30] ≤

Var [W]

30

2

=

225

900

=

1

4

(4)

Quiz 7.3

Deﬁne the random variable W = (X − µ

X

)

2

. Observe that V

100

(X) = M

100

(W). By

Theorem 7.6, the mean square error is

E

_

(M

100

(W) −µ

W

)

2

_

=

Var[W]

100

(1)

Observe that µ

X

= 0 so that W = X

2

. Thus,

µ

W

= E

_

X

2

_

=

_

1

−1

x

2

f

X

(x) dx = 1/3 (2)

E

_

W

2

_

= E

_

X

4

_

=

_

1

−1

x

4

f

X

(x) dx = 1/5 (3)

Therefore Var[W] = E[W

2

] − µ

2

W

= 1/5 − (1/3)

2

= 4/45 and the mean square error is

4/4500 = 0.000889.

47

Quiz 7.4

Assuming the number n of samples is large, we can use a Gaussian approximation for

M

n

(X). SinceE[X] = p and Var[X] = p(1 − p), we apply Theorem 7.13 which says that

the interval estimate

M

n

(X) −c ≤ p ≤ M

n

(X) +c (1)

has conﬁdence coefﬁcient 1 −α where

α = 2 −2

_

c

√

n

p(1 − p)

_

. (2)

We must ensure for every value of p that 1 − α ≥ 0.9 or α ≤ 0.1. Equivalently, we must

have

_

c

√

n

p(1 − p)

_

≥ 0.95 (3)

for every value of p. Since (x) is an increasing function of x, we must satisfy c

√

n ≥

1.65p(1 − p). Since p(1 − p) ≤ 1/4 for all p, we require that

c ≥

1.65

4

√

n

=

0.41

√

n

. (4)

The 0.9 conﬁdence interval estimate of p is

M

n

(X) −

0.41

√

n

≤ p ≤ M

n

(X) +

0.41

√

n

. (5)

For the 0.99 conﬁdence interval, we have α ≤ 0.01, implying (c

√

n/( p(1−p))) ≥ 0.995.

This implies c

√

n ≥ 2.58p(1 − p). Since p(1 − p) ≤ 1/4 for all p, we require that

c ≥ (0.25)(2.58)/

√

n. In this case, the 0.99 conﬁdence interval estimate is

M

n

(X) −

0.645

√

n

≤ p ≤ M

n

(X) +

0.645

√

n

. (6)

Note that if M

100

(X) = 0.4, then the 0.99 conﬁdence interval estimate is

0.3355 ≤ p ≤ 0.4645. (7)

The interval is wide because the 0.99 conﬁdence is high.

Quiz 7.5

Following the approach of bernoullitraces.m, we generate m = 1000 sample

paths, each sample path having n = 100 Bernoulli traces. at time k, OK(k) counts the

fraction of sample paths that have sample mean within one standard error of p. The pro-

gram bernoullisample.m generates graphs the number of traces within one standard

error as a function of the time, i.e. the number of trials in each trace.

48

function OK=bernoullisample(n,m,p);

x=reshape(bernoullirv(p,m*n),n,m);

nn=(1:n)’*ones(1,m);

MN=cumsum(x)./nn;

stderr=sqrt(p*(1-p))./sqrt((1:n)’);

stderrmat=stderr*ones(1,m);

OK=sum(abs(MN-p)<stderrmat,2)/m;

plot(1:n,OK,’-s’);

The following graph was generated by bernoullisample(100,5000,0.5):

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

0.4

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.8

0.9

1

As we would expect, as m gets large, the fraction of traces within one standard error ap-

proaches 2(1) −1 ≈ 0.68. The unusual sawtooth pattern, though perhaps unexpected, is

examined in Problem 7.5.2.

49

Quiz Solutions – Chapter 8

Quiz 8.1

From the problem statement, each X

i

has PDF and CDF

f

X

i

(x) =

_

e

−x

x ≥ 0

0 otherwise

F

X

i

(x) =

_

0 x < 0

1 −e

−x

x ≥ 0

(1)

Hence, the CDF of the maximum of X

1

, . . . , X

15

obeys

F

X

(x) = P [X ≤ x] = P [X

1

≤ x, X

2

≤ x, · · · , X

15

≤ x] = [P [X

i

≤ x]]

15

. (2)

This implies that for x ≥ 0,

F

X

(x) =

_

F

X

i

(x)

_

15

=

_

1 −e

−x

_

15

(3)

To design a signiﬁcance test, we must choose a rejection region for X. A reasonable choice

is to reject the hypothesis if X is too small. That is, let R = {X ≤ r}. For a signiﬁcance

level of α = 0.01, we obtain

α = P [X ≤ r] = (1 −e

−r

)

15

= 0.01 (4)

It is straightforward to show that

r = −ln

_

1 −(0.01)

1/15

_

= 1.33 (5)

Hence, if we observe X < 1.33, then we reject the hypothesis.

Quiz 8.2

From the problem statement, the conditional PMFs of K are

P

K|H

0

(k) =

_

10

4k

e

−10

4

k!

k = 0, 1, . . .

0 otherwise

(1)

P

K|H

1

(k) =

_

10

6k

e

−10

6

k!

k = 0, 1, . . .

0 otherwise

(2)

Since the two hypotheses are equally likely, the MAP and ML tests are the same. From

Theorem 8.6, the ML hypothesis rule is

k ∈ A

0

if P

K|H

0

(k) ≥ P

K|H

1

(k) ; k ∈ A

1

otherwise. (3)

This rule simpliﬁes to

k ∈ A

0

if k ≤ k

∗

=

10

6

−10

4

ln 100

= 214, 975.7; k ∈ A

1

otherwise. (4)

Thus if we observe at least 214, 976 photons, then we accept hypothesis H

1

.

50

Quiz 8.3

For the QPSK system, a symbol error occurs when s

i

is transmitted but (X

1

, X

2

) ∈ A

j

for some j = i . For a QPSK system, it is easier to calculate the probability of a correct

decision. Given H

0

, the conditional probability of a correct decision is

P [C|H

0

] = P [X

1

> 0, X

2

> 0|H

0

] = P

_

√

E/2 + N

1

> 0,

√

E/2 + N

2

> 0

_

(1)

Because of the symmetry of the signals, P[C|H

0

] = P[C|H

i

] for all i . This implies the

probability of a correct decision is P[C] = P[C|H

0

]. Since N

1

and N

2

are iid Gaussian

(0, σ) random variables, we have

P [C] = P [C|H

0

] = P

_

√

E/2 + N

1

> 0

_

P

_

√

E/2 + N

2

> 0

_

(2)

=

_

P

_

N

1

> −

√

E/2

__

2

(3)

=

_

1 −

_

−

√

E/2

σ

__

2

(4)

Since (−x) = 1 − (x), we have P[C] =

2

(

_

E/2σ

2

). Equivalently, the probability

of error is

P

ERR

= 1 − P [C] = 1 −

2

_

_

E

2σ

2

_

(5)

Quiz 8.4

To generate the ROC, the existing program sqdistor already calculates this miss

probability P

MISS

= P

01

and the false alarm probability P

FA

= P

10

. The modiﬁed pro-

gram, sqdistroc.m is essentially the same as sqdistor except the output is a ma-

trix FM whose columns are the false alarm and miss probabilities. Next, the program

sqdistrocplot.m calls sqdistroc three times to generate a plot that compares the

receiver performance for the three requested values of d. Here is the modiﬁed code:

function FM=sqdistroc(v,d,m,T)

%square law distortion recvr

%P(error) for m bits tested

%transmit v volts or -v volts,

%add N volts, N is Gauss(0,1)

%add d(v+N)ˆ2 distortion

%receive 1 if x>T, otherwise 0

%FM = [P(FA) P(MISS)]

x=(v+randn(m,1));

[XX,TT]=ndgrid(x,T(:));

P01=sum((XX+d*(XX.ˆ2)< TT),1)/m;

x= -v+randn(m,1);

[XX,TT]=ndgrid(x,T(:));

P10=sum((XX+d*(XX.ˆ2)>TT),1)/m;

FM=[P10(:) P01(:)];

function FM=sqdistrocplot(v,m,T);

FM1=sqdistroc(v,0.1,m,T);

FM2=sqdistroc(v,0.2,m,T);

FM5=sqdistroc(v,0.3,m,T);

FM=[FM1 FM2 FM5];

loglog(FM1(:,1),FM1(:,2),’-k’, ...

FM2(:,1),FM2(:,2),’--k’, ...

FM5(:,1),FM5(:,2),’:k’);

legend(’\it d=0.1’,’\it d=0.2’,...

’\it d=0.3’,3)

ylabel(’P_{MISS}’);

xlabel(’P_{FA}’);

51

To see the effect of d, the commands

T=-3:0.1:3; sqdistrocplot(3,100000,T);

generated the plot shown in Figure 3.

10

−5

10

−4

10

−3

10

−2

10

−1

10

0

10

−5

10

−4

10

−3

10

−2

10

−1

10

0

P

M

I

S

S

P

FA

d=0.1

d=0.2

d=0.3

T=-3:0.1:3; sqdistrocplot(3,100000,T);

Figure 3: The receiver operating curve for the communications system of Quiz 8.4 with

squared distortion.

52

Quiz Solutions – Chapter 9

Quiz 9.1

(1) First, we calculate the marginal PDF for 0 ≤ y ≤ 1:

f

Y

(y) =

_

y

0

2(y + x) dx = 2xy + x

2

¸

¸

¸

x=y

x=0

= 3y

2

(1)

This implies the conditional PDF of X given Y is

f

X|Y

(x|y) =

f

X,Y

(x, y)

f

Y

(y)

=

_

2

3y

+

2x

3y

2

0 ≤ x ≤ y

0 otherwise

(2)

(2) The minimum mean square error estimate of X given Y = y is

ˆ x

M

(y) = E [X|Y = y] =

_

y

0

_

2x

3y

+

2x

2

3y

2

_

dx = 5y/9 (3)

Thus the MMSE estimator of X given Y is

ˆ

X

M

(Y) = 5Y/9.

(3) To obtain the conditional PDF f

Y|X

(y|x), we need the marginal PDF f

X

(x). For

0 ≤ x ≤ 1,

f

X

(x) =

_

1

x

2(y + x) dy = y

2

+2xy

¸

¸

¸

y=1

y=x

= 1 +2x −3x

2

(4)

(5)

For 0 ≤ x ≤ 1, the conditional PDF of Y given X is

f

Y|X

(y|x) =

_

2(y+x)

1+2x−3x

2

x ≤ y ≤ 1

0 otherwise

(6)

(4) The MMSE estimate of Y given X = x is

ˆ y

M

(x) = E [Y|X = x] =

_

1

x

2y

2

+2xy

1 +2x −3x

2

dy (7)

=

2y

3

/3 + xy

2

1 +2x −3x

2

¸

¸

¸

¸

y=1

y=x

(8)

=

2 +3x −5x

3

3 +6x −9x

2

(9)

53

Quiz 9.2

(1) Since the expectation of the sum equals the sum of the expectations,

E [R] = E [T] + E [X] = 0 (1)

(2) Since T and X are independent, the variance of the sum R = T + X is

Var[R] = Var[T] +Var[X] = 9 +3 = 12 (2)

(3) Since T and R have expected values E[R] = E[T] = 0,

Cov [T, R] = E [T R] = E [T(T + X)] = E

_

T

2

_

+ E [T X] (3)

Since T and X are independent and have zero expected value, E[T X] = E[T]E[X] =

0 and E[T

2

] = Var[T]. Thus Cov[T, R] = Var[T] = 9.

(4) From Deﬁnition 4.8, the correlation coefﬁcient of T and R is

ρ

T,R

=

Cov [T, R]

√

Var[R] Var[T]

=

σ

T

σ

R

=

√

3/2 (4)

(5) From Theorem 9.4, the optimum linear estimate of T given R is

ˆ

T

L

(R) = ρ

T,R

σ

T

σ

R

(R − E [R]) + E [T] (5)

Since E[R] = E[T] = 0 and ρ

T,R

= σ

T

/σ

R

,

ˆ

T

L

(R) =

σ

2

T

σ

2

R

R =

σ

2

T

σ

2

T

+σ

2

X

R =

3

4

R (6)

Hence a

∗

= 3/4 and b

∗

= 0.

(6) By Theorem 9.4, the mean square error of the linear estimate is

e

∗

L

= Var[T](1 −ρ

2

T,R

) = 9(1 −3/4) = 9/4 (7)

Quiz 9.3

When R = r, the conditional PDF of X = Y −40−40 log

10

r is Gaussian with expected

value −40 −40 log

10

r and variance 64. The conditional PDF of X given R is

f

X|R

(x|r) =

1

√

128π

e

−(x+40+40 log

10

r)

2

/128

(1)

54

From the conditional PDF f

X|R

(x|r), we can use Deﬁnition 9.2 to write the ML estimate

of R given X = x as

ˆ r

ML

(x) = arg max

r≥0

f

X|R

(x|r) (2)

We observe that f

X|R

(x|r) is maximized when the exponent (x + 40 + 40 log

10

r)

2

is

minimized. This minimum occurs when the exponent is zero, yielding

log

10

r = −1 − x/40 (3)

or

ˆ r

ML

(x) = (0.1)10

−x/40

m (4)

If the result doesn’t look correct, note that a typical ﬁgure for the signal strength might be

x = −120 dB. This corresponds to a distance estimate of ˆ r

ML

(−120) = 100 m.

For the MAP estimate, we observe that the joint PDF of X and R is

f

X,R

(x, r) = f

X|R

(x|r) f

R

(r) =

1

10

6

√

32π

re

−(x+40+40 log

10

r)

2

/128

(5)

From Theorem 9.6, the MAP estimate of R given X = x is the value of r that maximizes

f

X,R

(x, r). That is,

ˆ r

MAP

(x) = arg max

0≤r≤1000

f

X,R

(x, r) (6)

Note that we have included the constraint r ≤ 1000 in the maximization to highlight the

fact that under our probability model, R ≤ 1000 m. Setting the derivative of f

X,R

(x, r)

with respect to r to zero yields

e

−(x+40+40 log

10

r)

2

/128

_

1 −

80 log

10

e

128

(x +40 +40 log

10

r)

_

= 0 (7)

Solving for r yields

r = 10

_

1

25 log

10

e

−1

_

10

−x/40

= (0.1236)10

−x/40

(8)

This is the MAP estimate of R given X = x as long as r ≤ 1000 m. When x ≤ −156.3 dB,

the above estimate will exceed 1000 m, which is not possible in our probability model.

Hence, the complete description of the MAP estimate is

ˆ r

MAP

(x) =

_

1000 x < −156.3

(0.1236)10

−x/40

x ≥ −156.3

(9)

For example, if x = −120dB, then ˆ r

MAP

(−120) = 123.6 m. When the measured signal

strength is not too low, the MAP estimate is 23.6% larger than the ML estimate. This re-

ﬂects the fact that large values of R are a priori more probable than small values. However,

for very low signal strengths, the MAP estimate takes into account that the distance can

never exceed 1000 m.

55

Quiz 9.4

(1) From Theorem 9.4, the LMSE estimate of X

2

given Y

2

is

ˆ

X

2

(Y

2

) = a

∗

Y

2

+b

∗

where

a

∗

=

Cov [X

2

, Y

2

]

Var[Y

2

]

, b

∗

= µ

X

2

−a

∗

µ

Y

2

. (1)

Because E[X] = E[Y] = 0,

Cov [X

2

, Y

2

] = E [X

2

Y

2

] = E [X

2

(X

2

+ W

2

)] = E

_

X

2

2

_

= 1 (2)

Var[Y

2

] = Var[X

2

] +Var[W

2

] = E

_

X

2

2

_

+ E

_

W

2

2

_

= 1.1 (3)

It follows that a

∗

= 1/1.1. Because µ

X

2

= µ

Y

2

= 0, it follows that b

∗

= 0. Finally,

to compute the expected square error, we calculate the correlation coefﬁcient

ρ

X

2

,Y

2

=

Cov [X

2

, Y

2

]

σ

X

2

σ

Y

2

=

1

√

1.1

(4)

The expected square error is

e

∗

L

= Var[X

2

](1 −ρ

2

X

2

,Y

2

) = 1 −

1

1.1

=

1

11

= 0.0909 (5)

(2) Since Y = X + W and E[X] = E[W] = 0, it follows that E[Y] = 0. Thus we can

apply Theorem 9.7. Note that X and W have correlation matrices

R

X

=

_

1 −0.9

−0.9 1

_

, R

W

=

_

0.1 0

0 0.1

_

. (6)

In terms of Theorem 9.7, n = 2 and we wish to estimate X

2

given the observation

vector Y =

_

Y

1

Y

2

_

**. To apply Theorem 9.7, we need to ﬁnd R
**

Y

and R

YX

2

.

R

Y

= E

_

YY

_

= E

_

(X +W)(X

+W

)

_

(7)

= E

_

XX

+XW

+WX

+WW

_

. (8)

Because Xand Ware independent, E[XW

] = E[X]E[W

] = 0. Similarly, E[WX

] =

0. This implies

R

Y

= E

_

XX

_

+ E

_

WW

_

= R

X

+R

W

=

_

1.1 −0.9

−0.9 1.1

_

. (9)

In addition, we need to ﬁnd

R

YX

2

= E [YX

2

] =

_

E [Y

1

X

2

]

E [Y

2

X

2

]

_

=

_

E [(X

1

+ W

1

)X

2

]

E [(X

2

+ W

2

)X

2

]

_

. (10)

56

Since Xand Ware independent vectors, E[W

1

X

2

] = E[W

1

]E[X

2

] = 0 and E[W

2

X

2

] =

0. Thus

R

YX

2

=

_

E[X

1

X

2

]

E

_

X

2

2

_

_

=

_

−0.9

1

_

. (11)

By Theorem 9.7,

ˆ a = R

−1

Y

R

YX

2

=

_

−0.225

0.725

_

(12)

Therefore, the optimum linear estimator of X

2

given Y

1

and Y

2

is

ˆ

X

L

= ˆ a

Y = −0.225Y

1

+0.725Y

2

. (13)

The mean square error is

Var [X

2

] − ˆ a

R

YX

2

= Var [X] −a

1

r

Y

1

,X

2

−a

2

r

Y

2

,X

2

= 0.0725. (14)

Quiz 9.5

Since X and W have zero expected value, Y also has zero expected value. Thus, by

Theorem 9.7,

ˆ

X

L

(Y) = ˆ a

Y where ˆ a = R

−1

Y

R

YX

. Since X and W are independent,

E[WX] = 0 and E[XW

] = 0

. This implies

R

YX

= E [YX] = E [(1X +W)X] = 1E

_

X

2

_

= 1. (1)

By the same reasoning, the correlation matrix of Y is

R

Y

= E

_

YY

_

= E

_

(1X +W)(1

X +W

)

_

(2)

= 11

E

_

X

2

_

+1E

_

XW

_

+ E [WX] 1

+ E

_

WW

_

(3)

= 11

+R

W

(4)

Note that 11

**is a 20 ×20 matrix with every entry equal to 1. Thus,
**

ˆ a = R

−1

Y

R

YX

=

_

11

+R

W

_

−1

1 (5)

and the optimal linear estimator is

ˆ

X

L

(Y) = 1

_

11

+R

W

_

−1

Y (6)

The mean square error is

e

∗

L

= Var[X] − ˆ a

R

YX

= 1 −1

_

11

+R

W

_

−1

1 (7)

Now we note that R

W

has i, j th entry R

W

(i, j ) = c

|i −j |−1

. The question we must address

is what value c minimizes e

∗

L

. This problem is atypical in that one does not usually get

57

to choose the correlation structure of the noise. However, we will see that the answer is

somewhat instructive.

We note that the answer is not obviously apparent from Equation (7). In particular, we

observe that Var[W

i

] = R

W

(i, i ) = 1/c. Thus, when c is small, the noises W

i

have high

variance and we would expect our estimator to be poor. On the other hand, if c is large

W

i

and W

j

are highly correlated and the separate measurements of X are very dependent.

This would suggest that large values of c will also result in poor MSE. If this argument is

not clear, consider the extreme case in which every W

i

and W

j

have correlation coefﬁcient

ρ

i j

= 1. In this case, our 20 measurements will be all the same and one measurement is as

good as 20 measurements.

To ﬁnd the optimal value of c, we write a MATLAB function mquiz9(c) to calculate

the MSE for a given c and second function that ﬁnds plots the MSE for a range of values

of c.

function [mse,af]=mquiz9(c);

v1=ones(20,1);

RW=toeplitz(c.ˆ((0:19)-1));

RY=(v1*(v1’)) +RW;

af=(inv(RY))*v1;

mse=1-((v1’)*af);

function cmin=mquiz9minc(c);

msec=zeros(size(c));

for k=1:length(c),

[msec(k),af]=mquiz9(c(k));

end

plot(c,msec);

xlabel(’c’);ylabel(’e_Lˆ*’);

[msemin,optk]=min(msec);

cmin=c(optk);

Note in mquiz9 that v1 corresponds to the vector 1 of all ones. The following commands

ﬁnds the minimum c and also produces the following graph:

>> c=0.01:0.01:0.99;

>> mquiz9minc(c)

ans =

0.4500

0 0.5 1

0.2

0.4

0.6

0.8

1

c

e

L *

As we see in the graph, both small values and large values of c result in large MSE.

58

Quiz Solutions – Chapter 10

Quiz 10.1

There are many correct answers to this question. A correct answer speciﬁes enough

random variables to specify the sample path exactly. One choice for an alternate set of

random variables that would specify m(t, s) is

• m(0, s), the number of ongoing calls at the start of the experiment

• N, the number of new calls that arrive during the experiment

• X

1

, . . . , X

N

, the interarrival times of the N new arrivals

• H, the number of calls that hang up during the experiment

• D

1

, . . . , D

H

, the call completion times of the H calls that hang up

Quiz 10.2

(1) We obtain a continuous time, continuous valued process when we record the temper-

ature as a continuous waveform over time.

(2) If at every moment in time, we round the temperature to the nearest degree, then we

obtain a continuous time, discrete valued process.

(3) If we sample the process in part (a) every T seconds, then we obtain a discrete time,

continuous valued process.

(4) Rounding the samples in part (c) to the nearest integer degree yields a discrete time,

discrete valued process.

Quiz 10.3

(1) Each resistor has resistance R in ohms with uniform PDF

f

R

(r) =

_

0.01 950 ≤ r ≤ 1050

0 otherwise

(1)

The probability that a test produces a 1% resistor is

p = P [990 ≤ R ≤ 1010] =

_

1010

990

(0.01) dr = 0.2 (2)

59

(2) In t seconds, exactly t resistors are tested. Each resistor is a 1% resistor with proba-

bility p, independent of any other resistor. Consequently, the number of 1% resistors

found has the binomial PMF

P

N(t )

(n) =

_ _

t

n

_

p

n

(1 − p)

t −n

n = 0, 1, . . . , t

0 otherwise

(3)

(3) First we will ﬁnd the PMF of T

1

. This problem is easy if we view each resistor test

as an independent trial. A success occurs on a trial with probability p if we ﬁnd a

1% resistor. The ﬁrst 1% resistor is found at time T

1

= t if we observe failures on

trials 1, . . . , t − 1 followed by a success on trial t . Hence, just as in Example 2.11,

T

1

has the geometric PMF

P

T

1

(t ) =

_

(1 − p)

t −1

p t = 1, 2, . . .

9 otherwise

(4)

Since p = 0.2, the probability the ﬁrst 1% resistor is found in exactly ﬁve seconds is

P

T

1

(5) = (0.8)

4

(0.2) = 0.08192.

(4) From Theorem 2.5, a geometric random variable with success probability p has ex-

pected value 1/p. In this problem, E[T

1

] = 1/p = 5.

(5) Note that once we ﬁnd the ﬁrst 1% resistor, the number of additional trials needed to

ﬁnd the second 1% resistor once again has a geometric PMF with expected value 1/p

since each independent trial is a success with probability p. That is, T

2

= T

1

+ T

where T

**is independent and identically distributed to T
**

1

. Thus

E [T

2

|T

1

= 10] = E [T

1

|T

1

= 10] + E

_

T

|T

1

= 10

_

(5)

= 10 + E

_

T

_

= 10 +5 = 15 (6)

Quiz 10.4

Since each X

i

is a N(0, 1) random variable, each X

i

has PDF

f

X(i )

(x) =

1

√

2π

e

−x

2

/2

(1)

By Theorem 10.1, the joint PDF of X =

_

X

1

· · · X

n

_

is

f

X

(x) = f

X(1),...,X(n)

(x

1

, . . . , x

n

) =

k

i =1

f

X

(x

i

) =

1

(2π)

n/2

e

−(x

2

1

+···+x

2

n

)/2

(2)

60

Quiz 10.5

The ﬁrst and second hours are nonoverlapping intervals. Since one hour equals 3600

sec and the Poisson process has a rate of 10 packets/sec, the expected number of packets

in each hour is E[M

i

] = α = 36, 000. This implies M

1

and M

2

are independent Poisson

random variables each with PMF

P

M

i

(m) =

_

α

m

e

−α

m!

m = 0, 1, 2, . . .

0 otherwise

(1)

Since M

1

and M

2

are independent, the joint PMF of M

1

and M

2

is

P

M

1

,M

2

(m

1

, m

2

) = P

M

1

(m

1

) P

M

2

(m

2

) =

⎧

⎪

⎪

⎨

⎪

⎪

⎩

α

m

1

+m

2

e

−2α

m

1

!m

2

!

m

1

= 0, 1, . . . ;

m

2

= 0, 1, . . . ,

0 otherwise.

(2)

Quiz 10.6

To answer whether N

**(t ) is a Poisson process, we look at the interarrival times. Let
**

X

1

, X

2

, . . . denote the interarrival times of the N(t ) process. Since we count only even-

numbered arrival for N

(t ), the time until the ﬁrst arrival of the N

(t ) is Y

1

= X

1

+ X

2

.

Since X

1

and X

2

are independent exponential (λ) random variables, Y

1

is an Erlang (n =

2, λ) random variable; see Theorem 6.11. Since Y

i

(t ), the i th interarrival time of the N

(t )

process, has the same PDF as Y

1

(t ), we can conclude that the interarrival times of N

(t )

are not exponential random variables. Thus N

**(t ) is not a Poisson process.
**

Quiz 10.7

First, we note that for t > s,

X(t ) − X(s) =

W(t ) − W(s)

√

α

(1)

Since W(t ) −W(s) is a Gaussian random variable, Theorem 3.13 states that W(t ) −W(s)

is Gaussian with expected value

E [X(t ) − X(s)] =

E [W(t ) − W(s)]

√

α

= 0 (2)

and variance

E

_

(W(t ) − W(s))

2

_

=

E

_

(W(t ) − W(s))

2

_

α

=

α(t −s)

α

(3)

Consider s

≤ s < t . Since s ≥ s

, W(t ) − W(s) is independent of W(s

). This implies

[W(t ) − W(s)]/

√

α is independent of W(s

)/

√

α for all s ≥ s

. That is, X(t ) − X(s) is

independent of X(s

) for all s ≥ s

**. Thus X(t ) is a Brownian motion process with variance
**

Var[X(t )] = t .

61

Quiz 10.8

First we ﬁnd the expected value

µ

Y

(t ) = µ

X

(t ) +µ

N

(t ) = µ

X

(t ). (1)

To ﬁnd the autocorrelation, we observe that since X(t ) and N(t ) are independent and since

N(t ) has zero expected value, E[X(t )N(t

)] = E[X(t )]E[N(t

)] = 0. Since R

Y

(t, τ) =

E[Y(t )Y(t +τ)], we have

R

Y

(t, τ) = E [(X(t ) + N(t )) (X(t +τ) + N(t +τ))] (2)

= E [X(t )X(t +τ)] + E [X(t )N(t +τ)]

+ E [X(t +τ)N(t )] + E [N(t )N(t +τ)] (3)

= R

X

(t, τ) + R

N

(t, τ). (4)

Quiz 10.9

From Deﬁnition 10.14, X

1

, X

2

, . . . is a stationary random sequence if for all sets of

time instants n

1

, . . . , n

m

and time offset k,

f

X

n

1

,...,X

n

m

(x

1

, . . . , x

m

) = f

X

n

1

+k

,...,X

n

m

+k

(x

1

, . . . , x

m

) (1)

Since the random sequence is iid,

f

X

n

1

,...,X

n

m

(x

1

, . . . , x

m

) = f

X

(x

1

) f

X

(x

2

) · · · f

X

(x

m

) (2)

Similarly, for time instants n

1

+k, . . . , n

m

+k,

f

X

n

1

+k

,...,X

n

m

+k

(x

1

, . . . , x

m

) = f

X

(x

1

) f

X

(x

2

) · · · f

X

(x

m

) (3)

We can conclude that the iid random sequence is stationary.

Quiz 10.10

We must check whether each function R(τ) meets the conditions of Theorem 10.12:

R(τ) ≥ 0 R(τ) = R(−τ) |R(τ)| ≤ R(0) (1)

(1) R

1

(τ) = e

−|τ|

meets all three conditions and thus is valid.

(2) R

2

(τ) = e

−τ

2

also is valid.

(3) R

3

(τ) = e

−τ

cos τ is not valid because

R

3

(−2π) = e

2π

cos 2π = e

2π

> 1 = R

3

(0) (2)

(4) R

4

(τ) = e

−τ

2

sin τ also cannot be an autocorrelation function because

R

4

(π/2) = e

−π/2

sin π/2 = e

−π/2

> 0 = R

4

(0) (3)

62

Quiz 10.11

(1) The autocorrelation of Y(t ) is

R

Y

(t, τ) = E [Y(t )Y(t +τ)] (1)

= E [X(−t )X(−t −τ)] (2)

= R

X

(−t −(−t −τ)) = R

X

(τ) (3)

Since E[Y(t )] = E[X(−t )] = µ

X

, we can conclude that Y(t ) is a wide sense

stationary process. In fact, we see that by viewing a process backwards in time, we

see the same second order statistics.

(2) Since X(t ) and Y(t ) are both wide sense stationary processes, we can check whether

they are jointly wide sense stationary by seeing if R

XY

(t, τ) is just a function of τ.

In this case,

R

XY

(t, τ) = E [X(t )Y(t +τ)] (4)

= E [X(t )X(−t −τ)] (5)

= R

X

(t −(−t −τ)) = R

X

(2t +τ) (6)

Since R

XY

(t, τ) depends on both t and τ, we conclude that X(t ) and Y(t ) are not

jointly wide sense stationary. To see why this is, suppose R

X

(τ) = e

−|τ|

so that

samples of X(t ) far apart in time have almost no correlation. In this case, as t gets

larger, Y(t ) = X(−t ) and X(t ) become less and less correlated.

Quiz 10.12

From the problem statement,

E [X(t )] = E [X(t +1)] = 0 (1)

E [X(t )X(t +1)] = 1/2 (2)

Var[X(t )] = Var[X(t +1)] = 1 (3)

The Gaussian random vector X =

_

X(t ) X(t +1)

_

**has covariance matrix and corre-
**

sponding inverse

C

X

=

_

1 1/2

1/2 1

_

C

−1

X

=

4

3

_

1 −1/2

−1/2 1

_

(4)

Since

x

C

−1

X

x =

_

x

0

x

1

_

4

3

_

1 −1/2

−1/2 1

_ _

x

0

x

1

_

=

4

3

_

x

2

0

− x

0

x

+

x

2

1

_

(5)

the joint PDF of X(t ) and X(t +1) is the Gaussian vector PDF

f

X(t ),X(t +1)

(x

0

, x

1

) =

1

(2π)

n/2

[det (C

X

)]

1/2

exp

_

−

1

2

x

C

−1

X

x

_

(6)

=

1

√

3π

2

e

−

2

3

_

x

2

0

−x

0

x

1

+x

2

1

_

(7)

63

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

t

M

(

t

)

Figure 4: Sample path of 100 minutes of the blocking switch of Quiz 10.13.

Quiz 10.13

The simple structure of the switch simulation of Example 10.28 admits a deceptively

simple solution in terms of the vector of arrivals A and the vector of departures D. With the

introduction of call blocking. we cannot generate these vectors all at once. In particular,

when an arrival occurs at time t , we need to know that M(t ), the number of ongoing calls,

satisﬁes M(t ) < c = 120. Otherwise, when M(t ) = c, we must block the call. Call

blocking can be implemented by setting the service time of the call to zero so that the call

departs as soon as it arrives.

The blocking switch is an example of a discrete event system. The system evolves via

a sequence of discrete events, namely arrivals and departures, at discrete time instances. A

simulation of the system moves from one time instant to the next by maintaining a chrono-

logical schedule of future events (arrivals and departures) to be executed. The program

simply executes the event at the head of the schedule. The logic of such a simulation is

1. Start at time t = 0 with an empty system. Schedule the ﬁrst arrival to occur at S

1

, an

exponential (λ) random variable.

2. Examine the head-of-schedule event.

• When the head-of-schedule event is the kth arrival is at time t , check the state

M(t ).

– If M(t ) < c, admit the arrival, increase the system state n by 1, and sched-

ule a departure to occur at time t + S

n

, where S

k

is an exponential (λ)

random variable.

– If M(t ) = c, block the arrival, do not schedule a departure event.

• If the head of schedule event is a departure, reduce the system state n by 1.

3. Delete the head-of-schedule event and go to step 2.

After the head-of-schedule event is completed and any new events (departures in this sys-

tem) are scheduled, we know the system state cannot change until the next scheduled event.

64

Thus we know that M(t ) will stay the same until then. In our simulation, we use the vector

t as the set of time instances at which we inspect the system state. Thus for all times t(i)

between the current head-of-schedule event and the next, we set m(i) to the current switch

state.

The complete program is shown in Figure 5. In most programming languages, it is

common to implement the event schedule as a linked list where each item in the list has

a data structure indicating an event timestamp and the type of the event. In MATLAB, a

simple (but not elegant) way to do this is to have maintain two vectors: time is a list

of timestamps of scheduled events and event is a the list of event types. In this case,

event(i)=1 if the i th scheduled event is an arrival, or event(i)=-1 if the i th sched-

uled event is a departure.

When the program is passed a vector t, the output [m a b] is such that m(i) is the

number of ongoing calls at time t(i) while a and b are the number of admits and blocks.

The following instructions

t=0:0.1:5000;

[m,a,b]=simblockswitch(10,0.1,120,t);

plot(t,m);

generated a simulation lasting 5,000 minutes. A sample path of the ﬁrst 100 minutes of

that simulation is shown in Figure 4. The 5,000 minute full simulation produced a=49658

admitted calls and b=239 blocked calls. We can estimate the probability a call is blocked

as

ˆ

P

b

=

b

a +b

= 0.0048. (1)

In Chapter 12, we will learn that the exact blocking probability is given by Equation (12.93),

a result known as the “Erlang-B formula.” From the Erlang-B formula, we can calculate

that the exact blocking probability is P

b

= 0.0057. One reason our simulation underesti-

mates the blocking probability is that in a 5,000 minute simulation, roughly the ﬁrst 100

minutes are needed to load up the switch since the switch is idle when the simulation starts

at time t = 0. However, this says that roughly the ﬁrst two percent of the simulation time

was unusual. Thus this would account for only part of the disparity. The rest of the gap

between 0.0048 and 0.0057 is that a simulation that includes only 239 blocks is not all that

likely to give a very accurate result for the blocking probability.

Note that in Chapter 12, we will learn that the blocking switch is an example of an

M/M/c/c queue, a kind of Markov chain. Chapter 12 develops techniques for analyzing

and simulating systems described by Markov chains that are much simpler than the discrete

event simulation technique shown here. Nevertheless, for very complicated systems, the

discrete event simulation is widely-used and often very efﬁcient simulation method.

65

function [M,admits,blocks]=simblockswitch(lam,mu,c,t);

blocks=0; %total # blocks

admits=0; %total # admits

M=zeros(size(t));

n=0; % # in system

time=[ exponentialrv(lam,1) ];

event=[ 1 ]; %first event is an arrival

timenow=0;

tmax=max(t);

while (timenow<tmax)

M((timenow<=t)&(t<time(1)))=n;

timenow=time(1);

eventnow=event(1);

event(1)=[ ]; time(1)= [ ]; % clear current event

if (eventnow==1) % arrival

arrival=timenow+exponentialrv(lam,1); % next arrival

b4arrival=time<arrival;

event=[event(b4arrival) 1 event(˜b4arrival)];

time=[time(b4arrival) arrival time(˜b4arrival)];

if n<c %call admitted

admits=admits+1;

n=n+1;

depart=timenow+exponentialrv(mu,1);

b4depart=time<depart;

event=[event(b4depart) -1 event(˜b4depart)];

time=[time(b4depart) depart time(˜b4depart)];

else

blocks=blocks+1; %one more block, immed departure

disp(sprintf(’Time %10.3d Admits %10d Blocks %10d’,...

timenow,admits,blocks));

end

elseif (eventnow==-1) %departure

n=n-1;

end

end

Figure 5: Discrete event simulation of the blocking switch of Quiz 10.13.

66

Quiz Solutions – Chapter 11

Quiz 11.1

By Theorem 11.2,

µ

Y

= µ

X

_

∞

−∞

h(t )dt = 2

_

∞

0

e

−t

dt = 2 (1)

Since R

X

(τ) = δ(τ), the autocorrelation function of the output is

R

Y

(τ) =

_

∞

−∞

h(u)

_

∞

−∞

h(v)δ(τ +u −v) dv du =

_

∞

−∞

h(u)h(τ +u) du (2)

For τ > 0, we have

R

Y

(τ) =

_

∞

0

e

−u

e

−τ−u

du = e

−τ

_

∞

0

e

−2u

du =

1

2

e

−τ

(3)

For τ < 0, we can deduce that R

Y

(τ) =

1

2

e

−|τ|

by symmetry. Just to be safe though, we

can double check. For τ < 0,

R

Y

(τ) =

_

∞

−τ

h(u)h(τ +u) du =

_

∞

−τ

e

−u

e

−τ−u

du =

1

2

e

τ

(4)

Hence,

R

Y

(τ) =

1

2

e

−|τ|

(5)

Quiz 11.2

The expected value of the output is

µ

Y

= µ

X

∞

n=−∞

h

n

= 0.5(1 +−1) = 0 (1)

The autocorrelation of the output is

R

Y

[n] =

1

i =0

1

j =0

h

i

h

j

R

X

[n +i − j ] (2)

= 2R

X

[n] − R

X

[n −1] − R

X

[n +1] =

_

1 n = 0

0 otherwise

(3)

Since µ

Y

= 0, The variance of Y

n

is Var[Y

n

] = E[Y

2

n

] = R

Y

[0] = 1.

67

−15 −10 −5 0 5 10 15

0

0.2

0.4

0.6

f

S

X

(

f

)

−1500−1000 −500 0 500 1000 1500

0

2

4

6

8

x 10

f

S

X

(

f

)

−0.2 −0.1 0 0.1 0.2

−5

0

5

10

τ

R

X

(

τ

)

−2 −1 0 1 2

x 10

−3

−5

0

5

10

τ

R

X

(

τ

)

(a) W = 10 (b) W = 1000

Figure 6: The autocorrelation R

X

(τ) and power spectral density S

X

( f ) for process X(t ) in

Quiz 11.5.

Quiz 11.3

By Theorem 11.8, Y =

_

Y

33

Y

34

Y

35

_

**is a Gaussian random vector since X
**

n

is

a Gaussian random process. Moreover, by Theorem 11.5, each Y

n

has expected value

E[Y

n

] = µ

X

∞

n=−∞

h

n

= 0. Thus E[Y] = 0. Fo ﬁnd the PDF of the Gaussian vector

Y, we need to ﬁnd the covariance matrix C

Y

, which equals the correlation matrix R

Y

since

Y has zero expected value. One way to ﬁnd the R

Y

is to observe that R

Y

has the Toeplitz

structure of Theorem 11.6 and to use Theorem 11.5 to ﬁnd the autocorrelation function

R

Y

[n] =

∞

i =−∞

∞

j =−∞

h

i

h

j

R

X

[n +i − j ]. (1)

Despite the fact that R

X

[k] is an impulse, using Equation (1) is surprisingly tedious because

we still need to sum over all i and j such that n +i − j = 0.

In this problem, it is simpler to observe that Y = HX where

X =

_

X

30

X

31

X

32

X

33

X

34

X

35

_

(2)

and

H =

1

4

⎡

⎣

1 1 1 1 0 0

0 1 1 1 1 0

0 0 1 1 1 1

⎤

⎦

. (3)

In this case, following Theorem 11.7, or by directly applying Theorem 5.13 with µ

X

= 0

and A = H, we obtain R

Y

= HR

X

H

. Since R

X

[n] = δ

n

, R

X

= I, the identity matrix.

68

Thus

C

Y

= R

Y

= HH

=

1

16

⎡

⎣

4 3 2

3 4 3

2 3 4

⎤

⎦

. (4)

It follows (very quickly if you use MATLAB for 3 ×3 matrix inversion) that

C

−1

Y

= 16

⎡

⎣

7/12 −1/2 1/12

−1/2 1 −1/2

1/12 −1/2 7/12

⎤

⎦

. (5)

Thus, the PDF of Y is

f

Y

(y) =

1

(2π)

3/2

[det (C

Y

)]

1/2

exp

_

−

1

2

y

C

−1

Y

y

_

. (6)

A disagreeable amount of algebra will show det(C

Y

) = 3/1024 and that the PDF can be

“simpliﬁed” to

f

Y

(y) =

16

√

6π

3

exp

_

−8

_

7

12

y

2

33

+ y

2

34

+

7

12

y

2

35

− y

33

y

34

+

1

6

y

33

y

35

− y

34

y

35

__

. (7)

Equation (7) shows that one of the nicest features of the multivariate Gaussian distribution

is that y

C

−1

Y

y is a very concise representation of the cross-terms in the exponent of f

Y

(y).

Quiz 11.4

This quiz is solved using Theorem 11.9 for the case of k = 1 and M = 2. In this case,

X

n

=

_

X

n−1

X

n

_

and

R

X

n

=

_

R

X

[0] R

X

[1]

R

X

[1] R

X

[0]

_

=

_

1.1 0.9

0.9 1.1

_

(1)

and

R

X

n

X

n+1

= E

__

X

n−1

X

n

_

X

n+1

_

=

_

R

X

[2]

R

X

[1]

_

=

_

0.81

0.9

_

. (2)

The MMSE linear ﬁrst order ﬁlter for predicting X

n+1

at time n is the ﬁlter h such that

←−

h = R

−1

X

n

R

X

n

X

n+1

=

_

1.1 0.9

0.9 1.1

_

−1

_

0.81

0.9

_

=

1

400

_

81

261

_

. (3)

It follows that the ﬁlter is h =

_

261/400 81/400

_

**and the MMSE linear predictor is
**

ˆ

X

n+1

=

81

400

X

n−1

+

261

400

X

n

. (4)

to ﬁnd the mean square error, one approach is to follow the method of Example 11.13 and

to directly calculate

e

∗

L

= E

_

(X

n+1

−

ˆ

X

n+1

)

2

_

. (5)

69

This method is workable for this simple problem but becomes increasingly tedious for

higher order ﬁlters. Instead, we can derive the mean square error for an arbitary prediction

ﬁlter h. Since

ˆ

X

n+1

=

←−

h

X

n

,

e

∗

L

= E

_

_

X

n+1

−

←−

h

X

n

_

2

_

(6)

= E

_

(X

n+1

−

←−

h

X

n

)(X

n+1

−

←−

h

X

n

)

_

(7)

= E

_

(X

n+1

−

←−

h

X

n

)(X

n+1

−X

n

←−

h )

_

(8)

After a bit of algebra, we obtain

e

∗

L

= R

X

[0] −2

←−

h

R

X

n

X

n+1

+

←−

h

R

X

n

←−

h (9)

(10)

with the substitution

←−

h = R

−1

X

n

R

X

n

X

n+1

, we obtain

e

∗

L

= R

X

[0] −R

X

n

X

n+1

R

−1

X

n

R

X

n

X

n+1

(11)

= R

X

[0] −

←−

h

R

X

n

X

n+1

(12)

Note that this is essentially the same result as Theorem 9.7 with Y = X

n

, X = X

n+1

and

ˆ a

=

←−

h

. It is noteworthy that the result is derived in a much simpler way in the proof of

Theorem 9.7 by using the orthoginality property of the LMSE estimator.

In any case, the mean square error is

e

∗

L

= R

X

[0] −

←−

h

R

X

n

X

n+1

= 1.1 −

1

400

_

81 261

_

_

0.81

0.9

_

=

506

1451

= 0.3487. (13)

recalling that the blind estimate would yield a mean square error of Var[X] = 1.1, we see

that observing X

n−1

and X

n

improves the accuracy of our prediction of X

n+1

.

Quiz 11.5

(1) By Theorem 11.13(b), the average power of X(t ) is

E

_

X

2

(t )

_

=

_

∞

−∞

S

X

( f ) d f =

_

W

−W

5

W

d f = 10 Watts (1)

(2) The autocorrelation function is the inverse Fourier transform of S

X

( f ). Consulting

Table 11.1, we note that

S

X

( f ) = 10

1

2W

rect

_

f

2W

_

(2)

It follows that the inverse transform of S

X

( f ) is

R

X

(τ) = 10 sinc(2Wτ) = 10

sin(2πWτ)

2πWτ

(3)

(3) For W = 10 Hz and W = 1 kHZ, graphs of S

X

( f ) and R

X

(τ) appear in Figure 6.

70

Quiz 11.6

In a sampled system, the discrete time impulse δ[n] has a ﬂat discrete Fourier transform.

That is, if R

X

[n] = 10δ[n], then

S

X

(φ) =

∞

n=−∞

10δ[n]e

−j 2πφn

= 10 (1)

Thus, R

X

[n] = 10δ[n]. (This quiz is really lame!)

Quiz 11.7

Since Y(t ) = X(t −t

0

),

R

XY

(t, τ) = E [X(t )Y(t +τ)] = E [X(t )X(t +τ −t

0

)] = R

X

(τ −t

0

) (1)

We see that R

XY

(t, τ) = R

XY

(τ) = R

X

(τ − t

0

). From Table 11.1, we recall the prop-

erty that g(τ − τ

0

) has Fourier transform G( f )e

−j 2π f τ

0

. Thus the Fourier transform of

R

XY

(τ) = R

X

(τ −t

0

) = g(τ −t

0

) is

S

XY

( f ) = S

X

( f )e

−j 2π f t

0

. (2)

Quiz 11.8

We solve this quiz using Theorem 11.17. First we need some preliminary facts. Let

a

0

= 5,000 so that

R

X

(τ) =

1

a

0

a

0

e

−a

0

|τ|

. (1)

Consulting with the Fourier transforms in Table 11.1, we see that

S

X

( f ) =

1

a

0

2a

2

0

a

2

0

+(2π f )

2

=

2a

0

a

2

0

+(2π f )

2

(2)

The RC ﬁlter has impulse response h(t ) = a

1

e

−a

1

t

u(t ), where u(t ) is the unit step function

and a

1

= 1/RC where RC = 10

−4

is the ﬁlter time constant. From Table 11.1,

H( f ) =

a

1

a

1

+ j 2π f

(3)

(1) Theorem 11.17,

S

XY

( f ) = H( f )S

X

( f ) =

2a

0

a

1

[a

1

+ j 2π f ]

_

a

2

0

+(2π f )

2

_. (4)

(2) Again by Theorem 11.17,

S

Y

( f ) = H

∗

( f )S

XY

( f ) = |H( f )|

2

S

X

( f ). (5)

71

Note that

|H( f )|

2

= H( f )H

∗

( f ) =

a

1

(a

1

+ j 2π f )

a

1

(a

1

− j 2π f )

=

a

2

1

a

2

1

+(2π f )

2

(6)

Thus,

S

Y

( f ) = |H( f )|

2

S

X

( f ) =

2a

0

a

2

1

_

a

2

1

+(2π f )

2

_ _

a

2

0

+(2π f )

2

_ (7)

(3) To ﬁnd the average power at the ﬁlter output, we can either use basic calculus and

calculate

_

∞

−∞

S

Y

( f ) d f directly or we can ﬁnd R

Y

(τ) as an inverse transform of

S

Y

( f ). Using partial fractions and the Fourier transform table, the latter method is

actually less algebra. In particular, some algebra will show that

S

Y

( f ) =

K

0

a

2

0

+(2π f )

2

+

K

1

a

1

+(2π f )

2

(8)

where

K

0

=

2a

0

a

2

1

a

2

1

−a

2

0

, K

1

=

−2a

0

a

2

1

a

2

1

−a

2

0

. (9)

Thus,

S

Y

( f ) =

K

0

2a

2

0

2a

2

0

a

2

0

+(2π f )

2

+

K

1

2a

2

1

2a

2

1

a

1

+(2π f )

2

. (10)

Consulting with Table 11.1, we see that

R

Y

(τ) =

K

0

2a

2

0

a

0

e

−a

0

|τ|

+

K

1

2a

2

1

a

1

e

−a

1

|τ|

(11)

Substituting the values of K

0

and K

1

, we obtain

R

Y

(τ) =

a

2

1

e

−a

0

|τ|

−a

0

a

1

e

−a

1

|τ|

a

2

1

−a

2

0

. (12)

The average power of the Y(t ) process is

R

Y

(0) =

a

1

a

1

+a

0

=

2

3

. (13)

Note that the input signal has average power R

X

(0) = 1. Since the RC ﬁlter has a 3dB

bandwidth of 10,000 rad/sec and the signal X(t ) has most of its its signal energy below

5,000 rad/sec, the output signal has almost as much power as the input.

72

Quiz 11.9

This quiz implements an example of Equations (11.146) and (11.147) for a system in

which we ﬁlter Y(t ) = X(t ) + N(t ) to produce an optimal linear estimate of X(t ). The

solution to this quiz is just to ﬁnd the ﬁlter

ˆ

H( f ) using Equation (11.146) and to calculate

the mean square error e

L

∗ using Equation (11.147).

Comment: Since the text omitted the derivations of Equations (11.146) and (11.147), we

note that Example 10.24 showed that

R

Y

(τ) = R

X

(τ) + R

N

(τ), R

Y X

(τ) = R

X

(τ). (1)

Taking Fourier transforms, it follows that

S

Y

( f ) = S

X

( f ) + S

N

( f ), S

Y X

( f ) = S

X

( f ). (2)

Now we can go on to the quiz, at peace with the derivations.

(1) Since µ

N

= 0, R

N

(0) = Var[N] = 1. This implies

R

N

(0) =

_

∞

−∞

S

N

( f ) d f =

_

B

−B

N

0

d f = 2N

0

B (3)

Thus N

0

= 1/(2B). Because the noise process N(t ) has constant power R

N

(0) = 1,

decreasing the single-sided bandwidth B increases the power spectral density of the

noise over frequencies | f | < B.

(2) Since R

X

(τ) = sinc(2Wτ), where W = 5,000 Hz, we see from Table 11.1 that

S

X

( f ) =

1

10

4

rect

_

f

10

4

_

. (4)

The noise power spectral density can be written as

S

N

( f ) = N

0

rect

_

f

2B

_

=

1

2B

rect

_

f

2B

_

, (5)

From Equation (11.146), the optimal ﬁlter is

ˆ

H( f ) =

S

X

( f )

S

X

( f ) + S

N

( f )

=

1

10

4

rect

_

f

10

4

_

1

10

4

rect

_

f

10

4

_

+

1

2B

rect

_

f

2B

_. (6)

73

(3) We produce the output

ˆ

X(t ) by passing the noisy signal Y(t ) through the ﬁlter

ˆ

H( f ).

From Equation (11.147), the mean square error of the estimate is

e

∗

L

=

_

∞

−∞

S

X

( f )S

N

( f )

S

X

( f ) + S

N

( f )

d f (7)

=

_

∞

−∞

1

10

4

rect

_

f

10

4

_

1

2B

rect

_

f

2B

_

1

10

4

rect

_

f

10

4

_

+

1

2B

rect

_

f

2B

_ d f. (8)

To evaluate the MSE e

∗

L

, we need to whether B ≤ W. Since the problem asks us to

ﬁnd the largest possible B, let’s suppose B ≤ W. We can go back and consider the

case B > W later. When B ≤ W, the MSE is

e

∗

L

=

_

B

−B

1

10

4

1

2B

1

10

4

+

1

2B

d f =

1

10

4

1

10

4

+

1

2B

=

1

1 +

5,000

B

(9)

To obtain MSE e

∗

L

≤ 0.05 requires B ≤ 5,000/19 = 263.16 Hz.

Although this completes the solution to the quiz, what is happening may not be obvious.

The noise power is always Var[N] = 1 Watt, for all values of B. As B is decreased, the PSD

S

N

( f ) becomes increasingly tall, but only over a bandwidth B that is decreasing. Thus as

B descreases, the ﬁlter

ˆ

H( f ) makes an increasingly deep and narrow notch at frequencies

| f | ≤ B. Two examples of the ﬁlter

ˆ

H( f ) are shown in Figure 7. As B shrinks, the ﬁlter

suppresses less of the signal of X(t ). The result is that the MSE goes down.

Finally, we note that we can choose B very large and also achieve MSE e

∗

L

= 0.05. In

particular, when B > W = 5000, S

N

( f ) = 1/2B over frequencies | f | < W. In this case,

the Wiener ﬁlter

ˆ

H( f ) is an ideal (ﬂat) lowpass ﬁlter

ˆ

H( f ) =

⎧

⎨

⎩

1

10

4

1

10

4

+

1

2B

| f | < 5,000,

0 otherwise.

(10)

Thus increasing B spreads the constant 1 watt of power of N(t ) over more bandwidth. The

Wiener ﬁlter removes the noise that is outside the band of the desired signal. The mean

square error is

e

∗

L

=

_

5000

−5000

1

10

4

1

2B

1

10

4

+

1

2B

d f =

1

2B

1

10

4

+

1

2B

=

1

B

5000

+1

(11)

In this case, B ≥ 9.5 ×10

4

guarantees e

∗

L

≤ 0.05.

Quiz 11.10

It is fairly straightforward to ﬁnd S

X

(φ) and S

Y

(φ). The only thing to keep in mind is

to use fftc to transform the autocorrelation R

X

[ f ] into the power spectral density S

X

(φ).

The following MATLAB program generates and plots the functions shown in Figure 8

74

−5000 −2000 0 2000 5000

0

0.5

1

f

H

(

f

)

−5000 −2000 0 2000 5000

0

0.5

1

f

H

(

f

)

B = 500 B = 2500

Figure 7: Wiener ﬁlter for Quiz 11.9.

%mquiz11.m

N=32;

rx=[2 4 2]; SX=fftc(rx,N); %autocorrelation and PSD

stem(0:N-1,abs(sx));

xlabel(’n’);ylabel(’S_X(n/N)’);

h2=0.5*[1 1]; H2=fft(h2,N); %impulse/filter response: M=2

SY2=SX.* ((abs(H2)).ˆ2);

figure; stem(0:N-1,abs(SY2)); %PSD of Y for M=2

xlabel(’n’);ylabel(’S_{Y_2}(n/N)’);

h10=0.1*ones(1,10); H10=fft(h10,N); %impulse/filter response: M=10

SY10=sx.*((abs(H10)).ˆ2);

figure; stem(0:N-1,abs(SY10));

xlabel(’n’);ylabel(’S_{Y_{10}}(n/N)’);

Relative to M = 2, when M = 10, the ﬁlter H(φ) ﬁlters out almost all of the high

frequency components of X(t ). In the context of Example 11.26, the low pass moving

average ﬁlter for M = 10 removes the high frquency components and results in a ﬁlter

output that varies very slowly.

As an aside, note that the vectors SX, SY2 and SY10 in mquiz11 should all be real-

valued vectors. However, the ﬁnite numerical precision of MATLAB results in tiny imagi-

nary parts. Although these imaginary parts have no computational signiﬁcance, they tend

to confuse the stem function. Hence, we generate stem plots of the magnitude of each

power spectral density.

75

0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35

0

5

10

n

S

X

(

n

/

N

)

0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35

0

5

10

n

S

Y

2

(

n

/

N

)

0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35

0

5

10

n

S

Y

1

0

(

n

/

N

)

Figure 8: For Quiz 11.10, graphs of S

X

(φ), S

Y

(n/N) for M = 2, and S

φ

(n/N) for M = 10

using an N = 32 point DFT.

76

Quiz Solutions – Chapter 12

Quiz 12.1

The system has two states depending on whether the previous packet was received in

error. From the problem statement, we are given the conditional probabilities

P

_

X

n+1

= 0|X

n

= 0

_

= 0.99 P

_

X

n+1

= 1|X

n

= 1

_

= 0.9 (1)

Since each X

n

must be either 0 or 1, we can conclude that

P

_

X

n+1

= 1|X

n

= 0

_

= 0.01 P

_

X

n+1

= 0|X

n

= 1

_

= 0.1 (2)

These conditional probabilities correspond to the transition matrix and Markov chain:

0 1

0.01

0.1

0.99 0.9

P =

_

0.99 0.01

0.10 0.90

_

(3)

Quiz 12.2

From the problem statement, the Markov chain and the transition matrix are

0 1 1

0.6 0.2

0.2 0.6

0.4 0.6 0.4

P =

⎡

⎣

0.4 0.6 0

0.2 0.6 0.2

0 0.6 0.4

⎤

⎦

(1)

The eigenvalues of P are

λ

1

= 0 λ

2

= 0.4 λ

3

= 1 (2)

We can diagonalize P into

P = S

−1

DS =

⎡

⎣

−0.6 0.5 1

0.4 0 1

−0.6 −0.5 1

⎤

⎦

⎡

⎣

λ

1

0 0

0 λ

2

0

0 0 λ

3

⎤

⎦

⎡

⎣

−0.5 1 −0.5

1 0 −1

0.2 0.6 0.2

⎤

⎦

(3)

where s

i

, the i th row of S, is the left eigenvector of P satisfying s

i

P = λ

i

s

i

. Algebra will

verify that the n-step transition matrix is

P

n

= S

−1

D

n

S =

⎡

⎣

0.2 0.6 0.2

0.2 0.6 0.2

0.2 0.6 0.2

⎤

⎦

+(0.4)

n

⎡

⎣

0.5 0 −0.5

0 0 0

−0.5 0 0.5

⎤

⎦

(4)

Quiz 12.3

The Markov chain describing the factory status and the corresponding state transition

matrix are

77

2

0 1

0.9

0.1

1

1

P =

⎡

⎣

0.9 0.1 0

0 0 1

1 0 0

⎤

⎦

(1)

With π =

_

π

0

π

1

π

2

_

, the system of equations π

= π

P yields π

1

= 0.1π

0

and

π

2

= π

1

. This implies

π

0

+π

1

+π

2

= π

0

(1 +0.1 +0.1) = 1 (2)

It follows that the limiting state probabilities are

π

0

= 5/6, π

1

= 1/12, π

2

= 1/12. (3)

Quiz 12.4

The communicating classes are

C

1

= {0, 1} C

2

= {2, 3} C

3

= {4, 5, 6} (1)

The states in C

1

and C

3

are aperiodic. The states in C

2

have period 2. Once the system

enters a state in C

1

, the class C

1

is never left. Thus the states in C

1

are recurrent. That

is, C

1

is a recurrent class. Similarly, the states in C

3

are recurrent. On the other hand, the

states in C

2

are transient. Once the system exits C

2

, the states in C

2

are never reentered.

Quiz 12.5

At any time t , the state n can take on the values 0, 1, 2, . . .. The state transition proba-

bilities are

P

n−1,n

= P [K > n|K > n −1] =

P [K > n]

P [K > n −1]

(1)

P

n−1,0

= P [K = n|K > n −1] =

P [K = n]

P [K > n −1]

(2)

(3)

The Markov chain resembles

0 1

P K=2 [ ]

P K= [ 1]

3 4

P K=4 [ ]

2

P K=3 [ ]

P K=5 [ ]

1 1 1 1 1

… ...

78

The stationary probabilities satisfy

π

0

= π

0

P [K = 1] +π

1

, (4)

π

1

= π

0

P [K = 2] +π

2

, (5)

.

.

.

π

k−1

= π

0

P [K = k] +π

k

, k = 1, 2, . . . (6)

From Equation (4), we obtain

π

1

= π

0

(1 − P [K = 1]) = π

0

P [K > 1] (7)

Similarly, Equation (5) implies

π

2

= π

1

−π

0

P [K = 2] = π

0

(P [K > 1] − P [K = 2]) = π

0

P [K > 2] (8)

This suggests that π

k

= π

0

P[K > k]. We verify this pattern by showing that π

k

=

π

0

P[K > k] satisﬁes Equation (6):

π

0

P [K > k −1] = π

0

P [K = k] +π

0

P [K > k] . (9)

When we apply

∞

k=0

π

k

= 1, we obtain π

0

∞

n=0

P[K > k] = 1. From Problem 2.5.11,

we recall that

∞

k=0

P[K > k] = E[K]. This implies

π

n

=

P [K > n]

E [K]

(10)

This Markov chain models repeated random countdowns. The system state is the time until

the counter expires. When the counter expires, the system is in state 0, and we randomly

reset the counter to a new value K = k and then we count down k units of time. Since we

spend one unit of time in each state, including state 0, we have k −1 units of time left after

the state 0 counter reset. If we have a random variable W such that the PMF of W satisﬁes

P

W

(n) = π

n

, then W has a discrete PMF representing the remaining time of the counter at

a time in the distant future.

Quiz 12.6

(1) By inspection, the number of transitions need to return to state 0 is always a multiple

of 2. Thus the period of state 0 is d = 2.

(2) To ﬁnd the stationary probabilities, we solve the system of equations π = πP and

3

i =0

π

i

= 1:

π

0

= (3/4)π

1

+(1/4)π

3

(1)

π

1

= (1/4)π

0

+(1/4)π

2

(2)

π

2

= (1/4)π

1

+(3/4)π

3

(3)

1 = π

0

+π

1

+π

2

+π

3

(4)

79

Solving the second and third equations for π

2

and π

3

yields

π

2

= 4π

1

−π

0

π

3

= (4/3)π

2

−(1/3)π

1

= 5π

1

−(4/3)π

0

(5)

Substituting π

3

back into the ﬁrst equation yields

π

0

= (3/4)π

1

+(1/4)π

3

= (3/4)π

1

+(5/4)π

1

−(1/3)π

0

(6)

This implies π

1

= (2/3)π

0

. It follows from the ﬁrst and second equations that

π

2

= (5/3)π

0

and π

3

= 2π

0

. Lastly, we choose π

0

so the state probabilities sum to

1:

1 = π

0

+π

1

+π

2

+π

3

= π

0

_

1 +

2

3

+

5

3

+2

_

=

16

3

π

0

(7)

It follows that the state probabilities are

π

0

=

3

16

π

1

=

2

16

π

2

=

5

16

π

3

=

6

16

(8)

(3) Since the system starts in state 0 at time 0, we can use Theorem 12.14 to ﬁnd the

limiting probability that the system is in state 0 at time nd:

lim

n→∞

P

00

(nd) = dπ

0

=

3

8

(9)

Quiz 12.7

The Markov chain has the same structure as that in Example 12.22. The only difference

is the modiﬁed transition rates:

0 1

1

3 4

( ) 2/3

a

1 - ( ) 2/3

a

( ) 3/4

a

1 - 3/4 ( )

a

( ) 4/5

a

1 - 4/5 ( )

a

2

( ) 1/2

a

1- 1/2 ( )

a

…

The event T

00

> n occurs if the system reaches state n before returning to state 0, which

occurs with probability

P [T

00

> n] = 1 ×

_

1

2

_

α

×

_

2

3

_

α

×· · · ×

_

n −1

n

_

α

=

_

1

n

_

α

. (1)

Thus the CDF of T

00

satisﬁes F

T

00

(n) = 1−P[T

00

> n] = 1−1/n

α

. To determine whether

state 0 is recurrent, we observe that for all α > 0

P [V

00

] = lim

n→∞

F

T

00

(n) = lim

n→∞

1 −

1

n

α

= 1. (2)

80

Thus state 0 is recurrent for all α > 0. Since the chain has only one communicating class,

all states are recurrent. ( We also note that if α = 0, then all states are transient.)

To determine whether the chain is null recurrent or positive recurrent, we need to calcu-

late E[T

00

]. In Example 12.24, we did this by deriving the PMF P

T

00

(n). In this problem,

it will be simpler to use the result of Problem 2.5.11 which says that

∞

k=0

P[K > k] =

E[K] for any non-negative integer-valued random variable K. Applying this result, the

expected time to return to state 0 is

E [T

00

] =

∞

n=0

P [T

00

> n] = 1 +

∞

n=1

1

n

α

. (3)

For 0 < α ≤ 1, 1/n

α

≥ 1/n and it follows that

E [T

00

] ≥ 1 +

∞

n=1

1

n

= ∞. (4)

We conclude that the Markov chain is null recurrent for 0 < α ≤ 1. On the other hand, for

α > 1,

E [T

00

] = 2 +

∞

n=2

1

n

α

. (5)

Note that for all n ≥ 2

1

n

α

≤

_

n

n−1

dx

x

α

(6)

This implies

E [T

00

] ≤ 2 +

∞

n=2

_

n

n−1

dx

x

α

(7)

= 2 +

_

∞

1

dx

x

α

(8)

= 2 +

x

−α+1

−α +1

¸

¸

¸

¸

∞

1

= 2 +

1

α −1

< ∞ (9)

Thus for all α > 1, the Markov chain is positive recurrent.

Quiz 12.8

The number of customers in the ”friendly” store is given by the Markov chain

1 i i+1

p p p

( )( ) 1-p 1-q ( )( ) 1-p 1-q ( )( ) 1-p 1-q ( )( ) 1-p 1-q

( ) 1-p q ( ) 1-p q ( ) 1-p q ( ) 1-p q

0

××× ×××

81

In the above chain, we note that (1 − p)q is the probability that no new customer arrives,

an existing customer gets one unit of service and then departs the store.

By applying Theorem 12.13 with state space partitioned between S = {0, 1, . . . , i } and

S

**= {i +1, i +2, . . .}, we see that for any state i ≥ 0,
**

π

i

p = π

i +1

(1 − p)q. (1)

This implies

π

i +1

=

p

(1 − p)q

π

i

. (2)

Since Equation (2) holds for i = 0, 1, . . ., we have that π

i

= π

0

α

i

where

α =

p

(1 − p)q

. (3)

Requiring the state probabilities to sum to 1, we have that for α < 1,

∞

i =0

π

i

= π

0

∞

i =0

α

i

=

π

0

1 −α

= 1. (4)

Thus for α < 1, the limiting state probabilities are

π

i

= (1 −α)α

i

, i = 0, 1, 2, . . . (5)

In addition, for α ≥ 1 or, equivalently, p ≥ q/(1 − q), the limiting state probabilities do

not exist.

Quiz 12.9

The continuous time Markov chain describing the processor is

0 1

2

3.01

3 4

2

3

2

3

2

2

3

0.01

0.01

0.01

Note that q

10

= 3.1 since the task completes at rate 3 per msec and the processor reboots

at rate 0.1 per msec and the rate to state 0 is the sum of those two rates. From the Markov

chain, we obtain the following useful equations for the stationary distribution.

5.01p

1

= 2p

0

+3p

2

5.01p

2

= 2p

1

+3p

3

5.01p

3

= 2p

2

+3p

4

3.01p

4

= 2p

3

We can solve these equations by working backward and solving for p

4

in terms of p

3

, p

3

in terms of p

2

and so on, yielding

p

4

=

20

31

p

3

p

3

=

620

981

p

2

p

2

=

19620

31431

p

1

p

1

=

628, 620

1, 014, 381

p

0

(1)

82

Applying p

0

+ p

1

+ p

2

+ p

3

+ p

4

= 1 yields p

0

= 1, 014, 381/2, 443, 401 and the

stationary probabilities are

p

0

= 0.4151 p

1

= 0.2573 p

2

= 0.1606 p

3

= 0.1015 p

4

= 0.0655 (2)

Quiz 12.10

The M/M/c/∞queue has Markov chain

c c+1 1 0

λ λ λ λ λ

µ 2µ

cµ cµ cµ

From the Markov chain, the stationary probabilities must satisfy

p

n

=

_

(ρ/n) p

n−1

n = 1, 2, . . . , c

(ρ/c) p

n−1

n = c +1, c +2, . . .

(1)

It is straightforward to show that this implies

p

n

=

_

p

0

ρ

n

/n! n = 1, 2, . . . , c

p

0

(ρ/c)

n−c

ρ

c

/c! n = c +1, c +2, . . .

(2)

The requirement that

∞

n=0

p

n

= 1 yields

p

0

=

_

c

n=0

ρ

n

/n! +

ρ

c

c!

ρ/c

1 −ρ/c

_

−1

(3)

83

**Quiz Solutions – Chapter 1
**

Quiz 1.1 In the Venn diagrams for parts (a)-(g) below, the shaded area represents the indicated set.

M T O M T O M T O

(1) R = T c

(2) M ∪ O

(3) M ∩ O

M T

O

M T

O

M T

O

(4) R ∪ M Quiz 1.2 (1) A1 = {vvv, vvd, vdv, vdd} (2) B1 = {dvv, dvd, ddv, ddd} (3) A2 = {vvv, vvd, dvv, dvd} (4) B2 = {vdv, vdd, ddv, ddd} (5) A3 = {vvv, ddd} (6) B3 = {vdv, dvd}

(4) R ∩ M

(6) T c − M

(7) A4 = {vvv, vvd, vdv, dvv, vdd, dvd, ddv} (8) B4 = {ddd, ddv, dvd, vdd} Recall that Ai and Bi are collectively exhaustive if Ai ∪ Bi = S. Also, Ai and Bi are mutually exclusive if Ai ∩ Bi = φ. Since we have written down each pair Ai and Bi above, we can simply check for these properties. The pair A1 and B1 are mutually exclusive and collectively exhaustive. The pair A2 and B2 are mutually exclusive and collectively exhaustive. The pair A3 and B3 are mutually exclusive but not collectively exhaustive. The pair A4 and B4 are not mutually exclusive since dvd belongs to A4 and B4 . However, A4 and B4 are collectively exhaustive. 2

Quiz 1.3 There are exactly 50 equally likely outcomes: s51 through s100 . Each of these outcomes has probability 0.02. (1) P[{s79 }] = 0.02 (2) P[{s100 }] = 0.02 (3) P[A] = P[{s90 , . . . , s100 }] = 11 × 0.02 = 0.22 (4) P[F] = P[{s51 , . . . , s59 }] = 9 × 0.02 = 0.18 (5) P[T ≥ 80] = P[{s80 , . . . , s100 }] = 21 × 0.02 = 0.42 (6) P[T < 90] = P[{s51 , s52 , . . . , s89 }] = 39 × 0.02 = 0.78 (7) P[a C grade or better] = P[{s70 , . . . , s100 }] = 31 × 0.02 = 0.62 (8) P[student passes] = P[{s60 , . . . , s100 }] = 41 × 0.02 = 0.82 Quiz 1.4 We can describe this experiment by the event space consisting of the four possible events V B, V L, D B, and DL. We represent these events in the table: V D L 0.35 ? B ? ? In a roundabout way, the problem statement tells us how to ﬁll in the table. In particular, P [V ] = 0.7 = P [V L] + P [V B] P [L] = 0.6 = P [V L] + P [DL] (1) (2)

Since P[V L] = 0.35, we can conclude that P[V B] = 0.35 and that P[DL] = 0.6 − 0.35 = 0.25. This allows us to ﬁll in two more table entries: V D L 0.35 0.25 B 0.35 ? The remaining table entry is ﬁlled in by observing that the probabilities must sum to 1. This implies P[D B] = 0.05 and the complete table is V D L 0.35 0.25 B 0.35 0.05 Finding the various probabilities is now straightforward: 3

(1) P[DL] = 0.25 (2) P[D ∪ L] = P[V L] + P[DL] + P[D B] = 0.35 + 0.25 + 0.05 = 0.65. (3) P[V B] = 0.35 (4) P[V ∪ L] = P[V ] + P[L] − P[V L] = 0.7 + 0.6 − 0.35 = 0.95 (5) P[V ∪ D] = P[S] = 1 (6) P[L B] = P[L L c ] = 0 Quiz 1.5 (1) The probability of exactly two voice calls is P [N V = 2] = P [{vvd, vdv, dvv}] = 0.3 (2) The probability of at least one voice call is P [N V ≥ 1] = P [{vdd, dvd, ddv, vvd, vdv, dvv, vvv}] = 6(0.1) + 0.2 = 0.8 An easier way to get the same answer is to observe that P [N V ≥ 1] = 1 − P [N V < 1] = 1 − P [N V = 0] = 1 − P [{ddd}] = 0.8 (4) (2) (3) (1)

(3) The conditional probability of two voice calls followed by a data call given that there were two voice calls is 1 P [{vvd} , N V = 2] P [{vvd}] 0.1 = (5) = = P [{vvd} |N V = 2] = P [N V = 2] P [N V = 2] 0.3 3 (4) The conditional probability of two data calls followed by a voice call given there were two voice calls is P [{ddv} , N V = 2] P [{ddv} |N V = 2] = =0 (6) P [N V = 2] The joint event of the outcome ddv and exactly two voice calls has probability zero since there is only one voice call in the outcome ddv. (5) The conditional probability of exactly two voice calls given at least one voice call is P [N V = 2, N V ≥ 1] P [N V = 2] 0.3 3 = = = (7) P [N V = 2|Nv ≥ 1] = P [N V ≥ 1] P [N V ≥ 1] 0.8 8 (6) The conditional probability of at least one voice call given there were exactly two voice calls is P [N V ≥ 1, N V = 2] P [N V = 2] P [N V ≥ 1|N V = 2] = = =1 (8) P [N V = 2] P [N V = 2] Given that there were two voice calls, there must have been at least one voice call. 4

P[C1 = v] = 0. {C1 = d} are independent events. we observe that P [N V ≥ 1] = P [{vd.2)(0.768 = P [N V ≥ 1. and the ﬁrst call is a data call.64 Next. (3) The problem statement that the calls were independent implies that the events the second call is a voice call.544.64 P[{dv}] = (0. N V ≥ 1] which shows the two events are dependent. N V is even] = 0. P[N V ≥ 1] = 0.2) = 0.Quiz 1.96) = P [N V = 2. (4) The probability of the joint event is P [C2 = v. we make the comparison P [N V = 2] P [N V ≥ 1] = (0. N V is even] = P [{vv}] = 0.96 Finally.96)(0.16 P[{dd}] = (0. each event has probability P [C2 = v] = P [{dv.2)2 = 0. Note that this shouldn’t be surprising since we used the information that the calls were independent in the problem statement to determine the probabilities of the outcomes. vv}] = 0. C1 = v] = P [{vd. we calculate the probability of the joint event: P [N V = 2.68 (8) Thus. vv}] = 0.16 (6) Since P[C1 = d]P[C2 = v] = (0. we can do the calculations to check: P [C1 = d.8) = 0.544. we conﬁrm that the events are independent. 5 (7) (5) (4) (3) (2) (1) .2)(0. we now can test for the independence of events. N V ≥ 1] = P [N V = 2] = P [{vv}] = 0.8) = 0. Further. P [N V is even] = P [{dd. vv}] = 0.8)(0. {C2 = v}. (1) First.68) = 0. there are four outcomes with probabilities P[{vv}] = (0.16. the events are dependent.96.80 From part (a).64 Also. it’s wise to avoid intuition and simply check whether P[AB] = P[A]P[B].8.16 P[{vd}] = (0. (2) The probability of the joint event is P [N V ≥ 1. Using the probabilities of the outcomes. P[C2 = v]P[N V is even] = (0.64)(0. C1 = v] Hence. Since P[C2 = v. the events are dependent. C2 = v] = P [{dv}] = 0.8) = 0. dv. Just to be sure.8 so that P [N V ≥ 1] P [C1 = v] = (0.8)(0. vv}] = 0.8)2 = 0.04 When checking the independence of any two events A and B.6 In this experiment.

0011. In this case. 2 For this problem. 1010. The number of ways of choosing such N a code word is M . There are 4 = 6 ways to do this.2 0. For each of the next three bits. (3) When the ﬁrst bit must be a zero. (2) An experiment that can yield all possible code words with two zeroes is to choose which 2 bits (out of 4 bits) will be zero.9 (1) In this problem. The other two bits then must be ones. 1001. 0110.Quiz 1. k bits received in error is the same as k failures in 100 trials. 3 Quiz 1. we can specify a code word by choosing M of the bits to be ones. Each subexperiment has two possible outcomes: 0 and 1. Hence. there are 8 = 56 code words. For N = 8 and M = 3.2)3 = 0.8 (1) We can view choosing each bit in the code word as a subexperiment. there are 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 = 24 = 16 possible code words.8 ¨ F1 0. The other N − M bits will be zeroes. The failure probability is = 1 − p and the success probability is 1 − = p. there are six code words with exactly two zeroes. then the ﬁrst subexperiment of choosing the ﬁrst bit has only one outcome. (4) For the constant ratio code. it is also possible to simply enumerate the six code words: 1100.992 (1) Quiz 1.100−k = 100 k 6 k (1 − )100−k (1) .7 Let Fi denote the event that that the user is found on page i. the probability of k bits in error and 100 − k correctly received bits is P Sk. Thus by the fundamental principle of counting.8 ¨ F3 ¨¨ ¨¨ ¨¨ ¨ ¨¨ ¨¨ c c c ¨¨ F3 F1 ¨ F2 ¨ 0. there are 1 × 2 × 2 × 2 = 8 ways of choosing a code word.2 0. The tree for the experiment is 0. Thus the probability the user is found is c c c P [F] = 1 − P F1 F2 F3 = 1 − (0.2 The user is found unless all three paging attempts fail. 0101. That is. we have two choices.8 ¨ F2 0.

and X(i)=3) is ﬂip i landed on the edge. we use the hist function to count how many occurences of each possible value of X(i). Since transistor failures are independent of each other. the transistors in the chip are like devices in series.01) (0.4. The probability that a chip works is P[C] = pn .97 = 161. That is.3660 P S1.3700 9 97 P S2. X(i)=2 if ﬂip i was tails.99)100 = 0. Let Ck denote the event that exactly k chips work. Thus each P[Ck ] has the binomial probability 9 (P [C])8 (1 − P [C])9−8 = 9 p 8n (1 − p n ).4) . then X(i)=3.01)(0. X(i)=1 if ﬂip i was heads. Second..01) (0. • If 0. + (2*(R>0.1.99 + P S2. Lastly. To see how this works.9819 = 0. P S0..For = 0.4.100).4 < R(i) and R(i)<=0. 700(0. X=(R<= 0. we note there are three cases: • If R(i) <= 0. The module works if either 8 chips work or 9 chips work.99) 8 = 0. we ﬁrst generate a vector R of 100 random numbers.99 = 100(0. we generate vector X as a function of R to represent the 3 possible outcomes of a ﬂip. 7 .10 Since the chip works only if all n transistors work.97 = 0.0610 (6) Quiz 1. • If 0.5 and 0.100 + P S1.100 = (1 − )100 = (0.11 R=rand(1.9.9 < R(i). chip failures are also independent.1849 P S3. These three cases will have probabilities 0.9)) .98 + P S3.9)).99) (2) The probability a packet is decoded correctly is just P [C] = P S0. then X(i)=2.99) 2 3 99 (2) (3) (4) (5) = 0. P [C8 ] = The probability a memory module works is P [M] = P [C8 ] + P [C9 ] = p 8n (9 − 8 p n ) Quiz 1.1:3) (1) (2) (3) For a M ATLAB simulation.. 8 P [C9 ] = (P [C])9 = p 9n . then X(i)=1.98 = 4950(0. 0. + (3*(R>0..*(R<=0.4).01. Y=hist(X.

16 2 PN (n) = c 1 + n=1 1 1 + 2 3 =1 (1) This implies c = 6/11.1 The sample space. X has the geometric PMF PX (x) = p(1 − p)x−1 x = 1.36 3.1)(0.1. Now we can interpret each experiment in the generic context of independent trials.Quiz Solutions – Chapter 2 Quiz 2. the remaining parts are straightforward.2 (1) To ﬁnd c. That is. . with probability p. .9)9 = 0.0 0.24 2. 2. (2) P[N = 1] = PN (1) = c = 6/11 (3) P[N ≥ 2] = PN (2) + PN (3) = c/2 + c/3 = 5/11 (4) P[N > 3] = ∞ n=4 PN (n) = 0 Quiz 2. Similar to Example 2.5 0. 3 G 0. Now that we have found c.24 2. then the probability exactly 10 bits are sent is P [X = 10] = PX (10) = (0. .0387 8 (2) . the trial is a success. (1) The random variable X is the number of trials up to and including the ﬁrst success. probabilities and corresponding grades for the experiment are Outcome P[·] BB BC CB CC Quiz 2.” Each bit is in error. 0 otherwise (1) (2) If p = 0. that is. we recall that the PMF must sum to 1.5 0.3 Decoding each transmitted bit is an independent trial where we call a bit error a “success.11.

(1) P[Y < 1] = FY (1− ) = 0 9 . That is. the probability that the third error occurs on bit 12 is PZ (12) = 11 (0.1849 2 (5) (4) The probability of no more than 2 errors is P [Y ≤ 2] = PY (0) + PY (1) + PY (2) = (0.25.01)(0.15) PZ (z) = z−1 3 p (1 − p)z−3 2 (9) Note that PZ (z) > 0 for z = 3.01.01)2 (0.4 Each of these probabilities can be read off the CDF FY (y).. This x=10 sum is not too hard to calculate. (3) The random variable Y is the number of successes in 100 independent trials.13.01)2 (0.910 = 0.75)9 = 0.3487.99)100 + 100(0. FY (y) takes the upper value FY (y0 ). . its even easier to observe that X ≥ 10 if the ﬁrst 10 bits are transmitted correctly. However. (6) If p = 0. P[X ≥ 10] = 0.25)3 (0. we must keep in + mind that when FY (y) has a discontinuity at y0 . 4. Just as in Example 2. . .0645 2 (10) Quiz 2.9207 100 (0.99)99 + = 0.1. Thus Z has the Pascal PMF (see Example 2. Y has the binomial PMF PY (y) = 100 y p (1 − p)100−y y (4) (3) If p = 0. the probability of exactly 2 errors is P [Y = 2] = PY (2) = 100 (0.99)98 2 (6) (7) (8) (5) Random variable Z is the number of trials up to and including the third success.99)98 = 0. P [X ≥ 10] = P [ﬁrst 10 bits are correct] = (1 − p)10 For p = 0. However. 5.The probability that at least 10 bits are sent is P[X ≥ 10] = ∞ PX (x).

3 c = 40 (1) ⎩ 0 otherwise (2) The expected value of C is E [C] = 25(0. we can draw the following tree: N =0 •T =120 0.7) + 40(0. Otherwise.3) + 120(0.3$$N =1 •T =105 $ (2) (1) $ $$ ¨¨$ rr rr0.4 (5) P[Y = 1] = P[Y ≤ 1] − P[Y < 1] = FY (1+ ) − FY (1− ) = 0.5 (1) With probability 0.1¨¨ ¨ ¨ ¨ 0.3) = 29.6 (3) P[Y > 2] = 1 − P[Y ≤ 2] = 1 − FY (2) = 1 − 0. This corresponds to the PMF ⎧ ⎨ 0.7 c = 25 PC (c) = 0. 105 PT (t) = 0.1 t = 120 ⎩ 0 otherwise From the PMF PT (t). the expected value of T is E [T ] = 75PT (75) + 90PT (90) + 105PT (105) + 120PT (120) = (75 + 90 + 105)(0.6 (6) P[Y = 3] = P[Y ≤ 3] − P[Y < 3] = FY (3+ ) − FY (3− ) = 0. 90.3.3 t = 75.8 = 0 Quiz 2.7. the cost T is T = 25N + 40(3 − N ) = 120 − 15N (2) To ﬁnd the PMF of T .6 (1) As a function of N .3 N =2 •T =90 r rr 0.6 = 0.5 cents Quiz 2. we can write down the PMF of T : ⎧ ⎨ 0.1) = 62 (2) (3) (4) 10 .2 (4) P[Y ≥ 2] = 1 − P[Y < 2] = 1 − FY (2− ) = 1 − 0.(2) P[Y ≤ 1] = FY (1) = 0.8 − 0. we have a data call and C = 40.8 = 0.3 N =3 •T =75 From the tree. a call is a voice call and C = 25. with probability 0.

4)2 = 0.44 = 0.4) + 4(0. the expected number of memory chips is 4 (2) E [M] = a=1 g(A)PA (a) = 4(0.5) = 2.4 − (1.4) + 2(0.8 (3) Since E[A] = 2. the expected number of applications is 4 E [A] = a=1 a PA (a) = 1(0.4 (1) (2) The second moment of N is 2 E N 2 = n=0 n 2 PN (n) = 02 (0.663.3) + 3(0. The two quantities are different because g(A) is not of the form α A + β. (3) 11 .4) + 22 (0. g(E[A]) = g(2) = 4.2) + 8(0.1) + 12 (0.44 (4) The standard deviation is σ N = √ Var[N ] = √ 0. 2 g(A) = 6 A = 3 ⎩ 8 A=4 (3) By Theorem 2.4 (2) (3) The variance of N is Var[N ] = E N 2 − (E [N ])2 = 2.8 The PMF PN (n) allows to calculate each of the desired quantities.4) + 2(0.1) = 2 (1) (2) The number of memory chips is M = g(A) where ⎧ ⎨ 4 A = 1.2) + 4(0. Quiz 2.7 (1) Using Deﬁnition 2.3) + 6(0. E[M] = 4.5) = 1.1) + 1(0.8 = g(E[A]). However.Quiz 2. (1) The expected value of N is 2 E [N ] = n=0 n PN (n) = 0(0.1) = 4.14.10.

. . 5 = 0.19375) + n=6 n(0.15625 12 . 3.17. . 2. E [N |N ≤ 10] = n 5 0 n ≤ 10 otherwise (7) (8) (9) n PN |N ≤10 (n) 10 (10) = n=1 n(0. 8.2 n = 1.25) ⎩ 0 otherwise ⎧ ⎨ 0.00625 n = 6.02 n = 1. 5 0 otherwise (2) (3) The problem statement tells us that P[T ] = 1 − P[I ] = 3/4. 50 PN |I (n) = (1) 0 otherwise (2) Also from the problem statement. . 2. 4.75) + 0.02(0.80 (6) By Theorem 2. 3. 7. 50 ⎩ 0 otherwise (4) First we ﬁnd 10 (3) (4) (5) P [N ≤ 10] = n=1 PN (n) = (0. 4. 10 ⎩ 0 otherwise (5) Once we have the conditional PMF. 7.19375 n = 1. 4.75) + 0.005 n = 6. we ﬁnd the PMF of N is PN (n) = PN |T (n) P [T ] + PN |I (n) P [I ] ⎧ ⎨ 0. 3.155)(5) + (0. 2. 9.Quiz 2. . the conditional PMF of N given N ≤ 10 is PN |N ≤10 (n) = PN (n) P[N ≤10] ⎧ ⎨ 0. 3.9 (1) From the problem statement.8 n = 6.10 (the law of total probability). 7. . 50 = 0(0. 2. 2.005)(5) = 0.8 n = 1.25) n = 1. . . 5 = 0. From Theorem 1. 5 = 0. 9. . 7.155 n = 1. we learn that the conditional PMF of N given the event I is 0.155/0. . 4. . . 3.2(0. the conditional PMF of N given the event T is PN |T (n) = 0.005/0. 5 n = 6. 8.02(0.00625) (11) (12) = 3. 10 ⎩ 0 otherwise ⎧ ⎨ 0. 2. 4. calculating conditional expectations is easy.

function M=samplemean(k). 2. M=zeros(k. m n is fairly random but as n gets 13 .M). . . plot(K. M(:. end. we ﬁrst ﬁnd the conditional second moment E N 2 |N ≤ 10 = n 5 n 2 PN |N ≤10 (n) 10 (13) n 2 (0. m 2 . The ith column M(:.19375) + 2 (14) (15) = 55(0. Each time samplemean(k) is called produces a random output.k). What is observed in these ﬁgures is that for small n.71875 − (3.10 8 6 4 2 0 0 50 100 10 8 6 4 2 0 0 500 1000 (a) samplemean(100) (b) samplemean(1000) Figure 1: Two examples of the output of samplemean(k) (6) To ﬁnd the conditional variance. .10 The function samplemean(k) generates and plots ﬁve m n sequences for n = 1. .00625) = 12.19375) + 330(0. m k . .i) of M holds a sequence m 1 .15625)2 = 2. X=duniformrv(0.00625) n=6 = n=1 n (0. for i=1:5. K=(1:k)’.i)=cumsum(X).5). . k./K. . .75684 (16) (17) Quiz 2.10. Examples of the function calls (a) samplemean(100) and (b) samplemean(1000) are shown in Figure 1.71875 The conditional variance is Var[N |N ≤ 10] = E N 2 |N ≤ 10 − (E [N |N ≤ 10])2 = 12.

Although each sequence m 1 . m 2 . that we generate is random.large. This random convergence is analyzed in Chapter 7. . m n gets close to E[X ] = 5. . the sequences always converges to E[X ]. . 14 .

Quiz Solutions – Chapter 3 Quiz 3.5)/4 = 5/8 Quiz 3.1 The CDF of Y is 1 FY(y) 0.2 0. We will evaluate this integral using integration by parts: ∞ −∞ f X (x) d x = 0 ∞ cxe−x/2 d x ∞ 0 (1) ∞ 0 = −2cxe−x/2 =0 + 2ce−x/2 d x (2) = −4ce−x/2 ∞ 0 = 4c (3) Thus c = 1/4 and X has the Erlang (n = 2. To ﬁnd c. we can calculate the probabilities: (1) P[Y ≤ −1] = FY (−1) = 0 (2) P[Y ≤ 1] = FY (1) = 1/4 (3) P[2 < Y ≤ 3] = FY (3) − FY (2) = 3/4 − 2/4 = 1/4 (4) P[Y > 1. we use ∞ the fact that −∞ f X (x) d x = 1.1 0 0 5 x 10 15 f X (x) = (x/4)e−x/2 x ≥ 0 0 otherwise fX(x) (4) 15 .5] = 1 − FY (1. λ = 1/2) PDF 0.5 0 0 2 y 4 ⎧ y<0 ⎨ 0 y/4 0 ≤ y ≤ 4 FY (y) = ⎩ 1 y>4 (1) From the CDF FY (y).5] = 1 − P[Y ≤ 1.2 (1) First we will ﬁnd the constant c and then we will sketch the PDF.5) = 1 − (1.

(2) The second moment of Y is E Y2 = ∞ −∞ y 2 f Y (y) dy = 1 −1 (3/2)y 4 dy = (3/10)y 5 1 −1 = 3/5. (4) Similarly. 0 otherwise. (1) (1) The expected value of Y is E [Y ] = ∞ −∞ y f Y (y) dy = 1 −1 (3/2)y 3 dy = (3/8)y 4 1 −1 = 0. For x ≥ 0.(2) To ﬁnd the CDF FX (x). P [−2 ≤ X ≤ 2] = FX (2) − FX (−2) = 1 − 3e−1 . (2) Note that the above calculation wasn’t really necessary because E[Y ] = 0 whenever the PDF f Y (y) is an even function (i. (9) (10) Quiz 3. (3) 16 . FX (x) = 0 x f X (y) dy = 0 x y −y/2 e dy 4 (5) (6) (7) x x 1 y − e−y/2 dy = − e−y/2 − 2 2 0 0 x −x/2 =1− e − e−x/2 2 The complete expression for the CDF is 1 FX(x) 0.3 The PDF of Y is 3 fY(y) 2 1 0 −2 0 y 2 f Y (y) = 3y 2 /2 −1 ≤ y ≤ 1. we ﬁrst note X is a nonnegative random variable so that FX (x) = 0 for all x < 0.5 0 0 5 x 10 15 FX (x) = 1− 0 x 2 + 1 e−x/2 x ≥ 0 otherwise (8) (3) From the CDF FX (x).e. f Y (y) = f Y (−y)).. P [0 ≤ X ≤ 4] = FX (4) − FX (0) = 1 − 3e−2 .

However. (5) (z) function and Table 3.(3) The variance of Y is Var[Y ] = E Y 2 − (E [Y ])2 = 3/5. √ b = 3 + 3 3.2 fX(x) 0 −5 x ← fX(x) ← f (y) Y 0 y 5 17 . Since E[X ] = 3 and Var[X ] = 9. 0 otherwise. 12 (2) √ b − a = ±6 3. b) random variable. it is important to remember that as the standard deviation increases.1 (1) The PDFs of X and Y are shown below. The fact that Y has twice the standard deviation of X is reﬂected in the greater spread of f Y (y). To ﬁnd a and b. The PDF of X is f X (x) = (1/3)e−x/3 x ≥ 0. we must have λ = 1/3.5 Each of the requested probabilities can be calculated using or Q(z) and Table 3. (1) √ Var[Y ] = √ 3/5. we apply Theorem 3. a+b =3 2 Var[X ] = (b − a)2 = 9.2. the peak value of the Gaussian PDF goes down. We start with the sketches.4 (1) When X is an exponential (λ) random variable.6 to write E [X ] = This implies a + b = 6. E[X ] = 1/λ and Var[X ] = 1/λ2 . f X (x) = 0 otherwise. The only valid solution with a < b is √ a = 3 − 3 3. (4) (2) We know X is a uniform (a. (4) The standard deviation of Y is σY = Quiz 3. Quiz 3.4 0. (3) (4) The complete expression for the PDF of X is √ √ √ 1/(6 3) 3 − 3 3 ≤ x < 3 + 3 3. fY(y) 0.

P [−1 < X ≤ 1] = FX (1) − FX (−1) = (1) − (−1) = 2 (1) − 1 = 0. Quiz 3. 1). since X is Gaussian (0.33 × 10−4 . (3) P[X = 1] = FX (1+ ) − FX (1− ) = 1 − 1/2 = 1/2.5] = Q( 3.75) = 1 − 2 0. (2) Quiz 3.7 18 . (3) Since Y is Gaussian (0. The resulting PDF is 0. 2). (1) The following probabilities can be read directly from the CDF: (1) P[X ≤ 1] = FX (1) = 1.0401. 2 (4) (1) (2) (4) Again.5 0 −2 (1.5] = Q(3.(2) Since X is Gaussian (0. P[X > 3. ⎩ 1 x ≥ 1. (5) Since Y is Gaussian (0. (2) P[X < 1] = FX (1− ) = 1/2. 2). (4) We ﬁnd the PDF f Y (y) by taking the derivative of FY (y).5 ) = Q(1.6826.75) = 0 x 2 ⎧ x < −1. ⎨ 1/4 f X (x) = (1/2)δ(x − 1) x = 1. ⎨ 0 FX (x) = (x + 1)/4 −1 ≤ x < 1. 1). P [−1 < Y ≤ 1] = FY (1) − FY (−1) 1 −1 = − σY σY (3) =2 1 − 1 = 0.5) = 2.6 The CDF of X is 1 FX(x) 0.5 0 −2 0 x 2 ⎧ −1 ≤ x < 1. ⎩ 0 otherwise.5 fX(x) 0. P[Y > 3.383.

for 0 < y < 1. FY (y) = y−y ⎩ 1 y ≥ 1. Using the CDF FX (x). (4) By taking the derivative of FY (y). ⎨ 0 2 /4 0 ≤ y < 1. FX (x) = 1 for x ≥ 2 since its always true that x ≤ 2. 19 .5 0 −1 0 1 y 2 3 1 y 2 3 ⎧ y < 0. FX (x) = x −∞ f X (y) dy = 0 x (1 − y/2) dy = x − x 2 /4. (2) (2) The probability that Y = 1 is P [Y = 1] = P [X ≥ 1] = 1 − FX (1) = 1 − 3/4 = 1/4. Finally.5 0 −1 X 0 1 x 2 3 ⎧ x < 0.6 . (5) 0. Lastly. FY (y) = 1 for all y ≥ 1. for 0 ≤ x ≤ 2. 1. FY (y) = P [Y ≤ y] = P [X ≤ y] = FX (y) .25 f Y (y) = 1 − y/2 + (1/4)δ(y − 1) 0 ≤ y ≤ 1 0 otherwise Y (6) Quiz 3. the PDF is zero. Note that when y < 0 or y > 1. we see that the jump in FY (y) at y = 1 is exactly equal to P[Y = 1]. the complete expression for the CDF of Y is 1 F (y) 0. Also.5 0 −1 Y (4) 0 As expected. Y is also nonnegative.8 (1) P[Y ≤ 6] = 6 −∞ f Y (y) dy = 6 0 (1/10) dy = 0.(1) Since X is always nonnegative. FX (x) = 0 for x < 0. Also. Thus FY (y) = 0 for y < 0. we obtain the PDF f Y (y). ⎨ 0 2 /4 0 ≤ x ≤ 2.5 f (y) 1 0. because Y ≤ 1. (3) (3) Since X is nonnegative. FX (x) = x−x ⎩ 1 x > 2. (1) The complete CDF of X is 1 F (x) 0.

0+exponentialrv(1/3. = otherwise. 2 (5) Quiz 3. = otherwise.15. end end A second method exploits the fact that if T is an exponential (λ) random variable. Here is a M ATLAB function that uses this method: function t=t2rv(m) i=0. while (i<m). the conditional PDF of Y given Y > 8 is f Y |Y >8 (y) = f Y (y) P[Y >8] 0 y > 8. 10 (2) (4) From Deﬁnition 3.m) generates the vector t. (1) 1 dy = 0.15.1). 1/2 8 < y ≤ 10. 0 otherwise. if (x>2) t(i+1)=x. we can calculate the conditional expectation E [Y |Y ≤ 6] = ∞ −∞ y f Y |Y ≤6 (y) dy = 6 0 y dy = 3. t=zeros(m. 1/6 0 ≤ y ≤ 6.lambda=1/3. the conditional PDF of Y given Y ≤ 6 is f Y |Y ≤6 (y) = (3) The probability Y > 8 is P [Y > 8] = 8 10 f Y (y) P[Y ≤6] 0 y ≤ 6. then T = T + 2 has PDF f T (t) = f T |T >2 (t).2 .9 A natural way to produce random variables with PDF f T |T >2 (t) is to generate samples of T with PDF f T (t) and then to discard those samples which fail to satisfy the condition T > 2.1). 0 otherwise. In this case the command t=2. 20 . (3) (5) From the conditional PDF f Y |Y ≤6 (y). we can calculate the conditional expectation E [Y |Y > 8] = ∞ −∞ y f Y |Y >8 (y) dy = 10 8 y dy = 9.(2) From Deﬁnition 3. i=i+1. 6 (4) (6) From the conditional PDF f Y |Y >8 (y). x=exponentialrv(lambda.

1. g) (4) (5) = 0. 0) + PQ. Quiz 4. −∞) = P[X ≤ ∞. 1) + PQ.12 + 0.G (0.1 Each value of the joint CDF can be found by considering the corresponding probability.G (0. ∞) = P[X ≤ ∞. (1) The probability that Q = 0 is P [Q = 0] = PQ. (3) FX.78 21 .Y (−∞.18 + 0.G (0.2 From the joint PMF of Q and G given in the table.16 + 0.Y (∞.Y (∞.08 = 0.12 = 0. 2) + PQ.G (1. Y ≤ −∞] = 0 since Y cannot take on the value −∞.G (0.16 + 0.24 + 0.24 + 0.6 (2) The probability that Q = G is P [Q = G] = PQ. (4) FX.12 + 0.Y (∞. (1) FX. Y ≤ 2] ≤ P[X ≤ −∞] = 0 since X cannot take on the value −∞. (2) FX. Y ≤ y] = P[Y ≤ y] = FY (y). 1) = 0.18 (3) The probability that G > 1 is 3 1 (1) (2) (3) P [G > 1] = g=2 q=0 PQ.18 + 0. y) = P[X ≤ ∞.6 (4) The probability that G > Q is 1 3 P [G > Q] = q=0 g=q+1 PQ. This result is given in Theorem 4.24 + 0.G (0. g) (6) (7) = 0.08 = 0.G (q. 2) = P[X ≤ −∞.G (q.06 + 0. we can calculate the requested probabilities by summing the PMF over those values of Q and G that correspond to the event. 3) = 0. 0) + PQ. Y ≤ ∞] = 1.Quiz Solutions – Chapter 4 Quiz 4.

4 0. y) d x d y (4) To integrate over A.5 0. we apply ∞ ∞ −∞ −∞ ∞ ∞ −∞ −∞ (3) f X.B (h.4 PH. b) (2) For each value of b. yielding 2 1 Y P [A] = 0 π/2 0 1 0 1 r 2 sin θ cos θ r dr dθ π/2 0 2 π/2 (5) (6) A 1 X = = r 3 dr ⎛ 1 0 sin θ cos θ dθ ⎞ ⎠ = 1/8 r 4 /4 ⎝ sin θ 2 (7) 0 22 . the marginal PMF of B is 1 PB (b) = h=−1 PH.3 Quiz 4.2 0. The easiest way to calculate these marginal PMFs is to simply sum each row and column: PH. this corresponds to calculating the row sum across the table of the joint PMF. we convert to polar coordinates using the substitutions x = r cos θ .Y (x.1 0. Similarly.3.2 h=0 h=1 0. 2 0 0 2 1 f X. y) d x d y = =c cx y d x dy y 0 2 0 (1) dy 2 0 x 2 /2 1 0 (2) =c (3) = (c/2) Thus c = 1.Quiz 4. we write P [A] = A y dy = (c/4)y 2 f X.6 0.Y (x.B (h. b) (1) For each value of h.2 0.Y (x. To calculate P[A].1 0 0. this corresponds to the column sum down the table of the joint PMF.4 To ﬁnd the constant c.3 By Theorem 4.1 0.2 PB (b) 0. the marginal PMF of H is PH (h) = b=0.2. Speciﬁcally. y) d x d y = 1.B (h.1 0 0. b) b = 0 b = 2 b = 4 PH (h) h = −1 0 0. y = r sin θ and d x d y = r dr dθ .

20 (T =36) 0.Y (x.05 t = 18 ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ 0. 90 ⎪ ⎪ ⎨ 0. ⎧ ⎪ 0. 000 l = 7. y) dy (x + y 2 ) d x = 6 2 x /2 + x y 2 5 x=1 x=0 (4) 6 3 + 6y 2 = (1/2 + y 2 ) = 5 5 (5) 5 0 Since f Y (y) = 0 for y < 0 or y > 1. the marginal PDF of X is f X (x) = ∞ −∞ f X.5 By Theorem 4. b) l = 518.10 (T =24) 0.20 (T =270) (3 + 6y 2 )/5 0 ≤ y ≤ 1 0 otherwise (6) From the table. 600 0.10 (T =360) b = 28.6 (A) The time required for the transfer is T = L/B. 776. 000 b = 14. For each pair of values of L and B. y) dy (1) For x < 0 or x > 1.1 t = 24 ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ 0.B (l.2 t = 270 ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ 0.05 (T =180) 0. writing down the PMF of T is straightforward. 400 0.Quiz 4.Y (x.20 (T =90) 0. the complete expression for the PDF of Y is f Y (y) = Quiz 4.8.05 t = 180 ⎪ ⎪ ⎪ 0. For 0 ≤ y ≤ 1. f X (x) = 6 5 1 0 (x + y 2 ) dy = 6 x y + y 3 /3 5 y=1 y=0 6x + 2 6 = (x + 1/3) = 5 5 (2) The complete expression for the PDf of X is f X (x) = (6x + 2)/5 0 ≤ x ≤ 1 0 otherwise (3) By the same method we obtain the marginal PDF for Y .1 t = 360 ⎪ ⎪ ⎩ 0 otherwise 23 (1) . f X (x) = 0.1 t = 120 PT (t) = ⎪ 0. 592. we can calculate the time T needed for the transfer.05 (T =18) 0. For 0 ≤ x ≤ 1. f Y (y) = = ∞ −∞ 6 1 f X. 800 0. We can write these down on the table for the joint PMF of L and B as follows: PL .2 t = 36. 400 l = 2.10 (T =120) 0.00 (T =540) b = 21.

25) = 4. As shown below. we ﬁnd the PDF is ⎧ 0 w<0 d FW (w) ⎨ f W (w) = = − ln w 0 ≤ w ≤ 1 ⎩ dw 0 w>1 Quiz 4. For 0 < w < 1.1 0. The calculus is simpler if we integrate over the region X Y > w. PL .(B) First.4 PL (l) 0.25 0.7 (A) It is helpful to ﬁrst make a table that includes the marginal PMFs. Speciﬁcally.15 0. Since the second moment of L is E L 2 = 12 (0.25) = 2.3 0.5. 24 t = 40 0.T (l. we observe that since 0 ≤ X ≤ 1 and 0 ≤ Y ≤ 1.5) + 3(0. t) l=1 l=2 l=3 PT (t) (1) The expected value of L is E [L] = 1(0. we calculate the CDF FW (w) = P[W ≤ w].25 (7) (8) (1) (2) (3) . Thus f W (0) = 0 and f W (1) = 1.25) + 22 (0.15 0.25) + 2(0. W = X Y satisﬁes 0 ≤ W ≤ 1. Y 1 w w 1 XY > w FW (w) = 1 − P [X Y > w] =1− =1− 1 1 w w/x 1 w (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) dy dx XY = w X (1 − w/x) d x = 1 − x − w ln x|x=1 x=w = 1 − (1 − w + w ln w) = w − w ln w The complete expression for the CDF is ⎧ w<0 ⎨ 0 FW (w) = w − w ln w 0 ≤ w ≤ 1 ⎩ 1 w>1 By taking the derivative of the CDF. the variance of L is Var [L] = E L 2 − (E [L])2 = 0.2 0. integrating over the region W ≤ w is fairly complex.5) + 32 (0.5 0.6 t = 60 0.1 0.5.

15) + 1(60)(0. f X (x) = ∞ −∞ f X.60 l=1 lt PL T (lt) (7) (8) (9) (10) = 1(40)(0.4) = 2400. 25 . (11) (B) As in the discrete case.1) = 96 (4) From Theorem 4.(2) The expected value of T is E [T ] = 40(0. T ] = E [L T ] − E [L] E [T ] = 96 − 2(48) = 0 (5) Since Cov[L . the covariance of L and T is Cov [L . T ] = 0.4) = 48. y) dy = 0 2 1 x y dy = x y 2 2 y=2 = 2x y=0 (12) Similarly.15) + 2(40)(0. y) d x = 0 2 xy dx = 1 2 x y 2 x=1 = x=0 y 2 (13) The complete expressions for the marginal PDFs are f X (x) = 2x 0 ≤ x ≤ 1 0 otherwise f Y (y) = y/2 0 ≤ y ≤ 2 0 otherwise (14) From the marginal PDFs.16(a).2) + 3(60)(0.Y (x.T = 0. the calculations become easier if we ﬁrst calculate the marginal PDFs f X (x) and f Y (y). the correlation coefﬁcient is ρ L .6) + 602 (0.3) + 3(40)(0. For 0 ≤ x ≤ 1. The second moment of T is E T 2 = 402 (0.6) + 60(0. (3) The correlation is 3 (4) (5) (6) E [L T ] = t=40. f Y (y) = ∞ −∞ f X.1) + 2(60)(0. Thus Var[T ] = E T 2 − (E [T ])2 = 2400 − 482 = 96.Y (x. it is straightforward to calculate the various expectations. for 0 ≤ y ≤ 2.

t) = 26 PL . Y ] = E [X Y ] − E [X ] E [Y ] = 2 8 − 9 3 4 3 = 0. 40) and (L . T ) = (2.T |A (l.9.T (l. 60). 40) + PL . the correlation coefﬁcient is ρ X. PL . dy = 3 y3 3 = 0 8 9 (21) (4) The covariance of X and Y is Cov [X.T (3. (2) The ﬁrst and second moments of Y are E [Y ] = E Y2 4 1 2 y dy = 3 −∞ 0 2 ∞ 2 1 = y 2 f Y (y) dy = y 3 dy = 2 −∞ 0 2 y f Y (y) dy = ∞ 2 (18) (19) The variance of Y is Var[Y ] = E[Y 2 ] − (E[Y ])2 = 2 − 16/9 = 2/9. (3) The correlation of X and Y is E [X Y ] = = ∞ ∞ −∞ −∞ 1 2 2 2 0 0 x y f X.T (2.T (3. y) d x. T ) = (3.Y (x. (L . Y ] = 0. 60) = 0.t) P[A] (1) 0 lt > 80 otherwise (2) . P [A] = P [V > 80] = PL . 60) + PL . (22) (5) Since Cov[X.45 By Deﬁnition 4.Y = 0. Quiz 4.(1) The ﬁrst and second moments of X are E [X ] = E X2 = ∞ −∞ ∞ −∞ x f X (x) d x = 0 1 2x 2 d x = 1 2 3 1 2 (15) (16) (17) x 2 f X (x) d x = 0 2x 3 d x = The variance of X is Var[X ] = E[X 2 ] − (E[X ])2 = 1/18.8 (A) Since the event V > 80 occurs only for the pairs (L . 60). T ) = (3. dy 1 0 (20) 2 x3 x y d x.

Y (x. we ﬁrst ﬁnd the conditional second moment E V 2 |A = l t (lt)2 PL . P [B] = B f X.T |A (l. y) /P [B] (x.We can represent this conditional PMF in the following table: PL . y) d x d y = = = 60 40 60 40 60 3 80/y xy dx dy 4000 x2 2 3 (8) dy (9) (10) (11) y 4000 80/y 9 3200 y − 2 y 40 4000 2 9 4 3 = − ln ≈ 0. E [V |A] = l t lt PL . 400 9 3 9 It follows that Var [V |A] = E V 2 |A − (E [V |A])2 = 622 2 9 (7) (B) For continuous random variables X and Y . t) (3) (4) 1 2 1 4 = (2 · 60) + (3 · 40) + (3 · 60) = 133 9 3 9 3 For the conditional variance Var[V |A].Y |B (x. y) = = f X.801 8 5 2 dy The conditional PDF of X and Y is f X. 80/y ≤ x ≤ 3 0 otherwise 27 (12) (13) . we ﬁrst calculate the probability of the conditioning event. t) t = 40 t = 60 l=1 0 0 l=2 0 4/9 1/3 2/9 l=3 The conditional expectation of V can be found from the conditional PMF. t) (5) (6) 4 1 2 = (2 · 60)2 + (3 · 40)2 + (3 · 60)2 = 18. y) ∈ B 0 otherwise K x y 40 ≤ y ≤ 60.T |A (l.Y (x.T |A (l.

**where K = (4000P[B])−1 . The conditional expectation of W given event B is E [W |B] = =
**

∞ ∞ −∞ −∞ 60 3 40

x y f X,Y |B (x, y) d x d y K x 2 y2 d x d y y2 x 3

x=3 x=80/y

(14) (15)

= (K /3) = (K /3)

80/y 60 40 60 40

dy

(16) (17) (18)

27y 2 − 803 /y dy

60 40

**= (K /3) 9y 3 − 803 ln y The conditional second moment of K given B is E W 2 |B = =
**

∞ ∞

≈ 120.78

−∞ −∞ 60 3 40

(x y)2 f X,Y |B (x, y) d x d y K x 3 y3 d x d y y3 x 4

x=3 x=80/y

(19) (20)

= (K /4)

80/y 60 40 60 40

dy

(21) (22) ≈ 16, 116.10 (23)

= (K /4)

81y 3 − 804 /y dy

60 40

= (K /4) (81/4)y 4 − 804 ln y It follows that the conditional variance of W given B is

Var [W |B] = E W 2 |B − (E [W |B])2 ≈ 1528.30 Quiz 4.9

(24)

(A) (1) The joint PMF of A and B can be found from the marginal and conditional PMFs via PA,B (a, b) = PB|A (b|a)PA (a). Incorporating the information from the given conditional PMFs can be confusing, however. Consequently, we can note that A has range S A = {0, 2} and B has range S B = {0, 1}. A table of the joint PMF will include all four possible combinations of A and B. The general form of the table is PA,B (a, b) b=0 b=1 a=0 PB|A (0|0)PA (0) PB|A (1|0)PA (0) PB|A (0|2)PA (2) PB|A (1|2)PA (2) a=2 28

Substituting values from PB|A (b|a) and PA (a), we have b=0 b=1 PA,B (a, b) a=0 (0.8)(0.4) (0.2)(0.4) (0.5)(0.6) (0.5)(0.6) a=2 or PA,B (a, b) b = 0 b = 1 a=0 0.32 0.08 0.3 0.3 a=2

**(2) Given the conditional PMF PB|A (b|2), it is easy to calculate the conditional expectation
**

1

E [B|A = 2] =

b=0

b PB|A (b|2) = (0)(0.5) + (1)(0.5) = 0.5

(1)

(3) From the joint PMF PA,B (a, b), we can calculate the the conditional PMF ⎧ 0.32/0.62 a = 0 PA,B (a, 0) ⎨ PA|B (a|0) = = 0.3/0.62 a = 2 (2) ⎩ PB (0) 0 otherwise ⎧ ⎨ 16/31 a = 0 = 15/31 a = 2 (3) ⎩ 0 otherwise (4) We can calculate the conditional variance Var[A|B = 0] using the conditional PMF PA|B (a|0). First we calculate the conditional expected value E [A|B = 0] =

a

a PA|B (a|0) = 0(16/31) + 2(15/31) = 30/31

(4)

**The conditional second moment is E A2 |B = 0 =
**

a

a 2 PA|B (a|0) = 02 (16/31) + 22 (15/31) = 60/31 (5)

The conditional variance is then Var[A|B = 0] = E A2 |B = 0 − (E [A|B = 0])2 = (B) (1) The joint PDF of X and Y is f X,Y (x, y) = f Y |X (y|x) f X (x) = (2) From the given conditional PDF f Y |X (y|x), f Y |X (y|1/2) = 29 8y 0 ≤ y ≤ 1/2 0 otherwise (8) 6y 0 ≤ y ≤ x, 0 ≤ x ≤ 1 0 otherwise (7) 960 961 (6)

**(3) The conditional PDF of Y given X = 1/2 is f X |Y (x|1/2) = f X,Y (x, 1/2)/ f Y (1/2). To ﬁnd f Y (1/2), we integrate the joint PDF. f Y (1/2) = Thus, for 1/2 ≤ x ≤ 1, f X |Y (x|1/2) = f X,Y (x, 1/2) 6(1/2) =2 = f Y (1/2) 3/2 (10)
**

∞ −∞

f X,1/2 ( ) d x =

1 1/2

6(1/2) d x = 3/2

(9)

(4) From the pervious part, we see that given Y = 1/2, the conditional PDF of X is uniform (1/2, 1). Thus, by the deﬁnition of the uniform (a, b) PDF, Var [X |Y = 1/2] = Quiz 4.10 (A) (1) For random variables X and Y from Example 4.1, we observe that PY (1) = 0.09 and PX (0) = 0.01. However, PX,Y (0, 1) = 0 = PX (0) PY (1) (1) (1 − 1/2)2 1 = 12 48 (11)

Since we have found a pair x, y such that PX,Y (x, y) = PX (x)PY (y), we can conclude that X and Y are dependent. Note that whenever PX,Y (x, y) = 0, independence requires that either PX (x) = 0 or PY (y) = 0. (2) For random variables Q and G from Quiz 4.2, it is not obvious whether they are independent. Unlike X and Y in part (a), there are no obvious pairs q, g that fail the independence requirement. In this case, we calculate the marginal PMFs from the table of the joint PMF PQ,G (q, g) in Quiz 4.2. PQ,G (q, g) g = 0 g = 1 g = 2 g = 3 PQ (q) q=0 0.06 0.18 0.24 0.12 0.60 0.04 0.12 0.16 0.08 0.40 q=1 PG (g) 0.10 0.30 0.40 0.20 Careful study of the table will verify that PQ,G (q, g) = PQ (q)PG (g) for every pair q, g. Hence Q and G are independent. (B) (1) Since X 1 and X 2 are independent, f X 1 ,X 2 (x1 , x2 ) = f X 1 (x1 ) f X 2 (x2 ) = (1 − x1 /2)(1 − x2 /2) 0 ≤ x1 ≤ 2, 0 ≤ x2 ≤ 2 0 otherwise 30 (2) (3)

(2) Let FX (x) denote the CDF of both X 1 and X 2 . The CDF of Z = max(X 1 , X 2 ) is found by observing that Z ≤ z iff X 1 ≤ z and X 2 ≤ z. That is, P [Z ≤ z] = P [X 1 ≤ z, X 2 ≤ z] = P [X 1 ≤ z] P [X 2 ≤ z] = [FX (z)]2 (4) (5)

To complete the problem, we need to ﬁnd the CDF of each X i . From the PDF f X (x), the CDF is ⎧ x <0 ⎨ 0 x 2 /4 0 ≤ x ≤ 2 FX (x) = f X (y) dy = (6) x−x ⎩ −∞ 1 x >2 Thus for 0 ≤ z ≤ 2, FZ (z) = (z − z 2 /4)2 (7)

The complete expression for the CDF of Z is ⎧ z<0 ⎨ 0 2 /4)2 0 ≤ z ≤ 2 FZ (z) = (z − z ⎩ 1 z>1

(8)

Quiz 4.11 This problem just requires identifying the various terms in Deﬁnition 4.17 and Theorem 4.29. Speciﬁcally, from the problem statement, we know that ρ = 1/2, µ1 = µ X = 0, and that σ1 = σ X = 1, σ2 = σY = 1. (2) (1) Applying these facts to Deﬁnition 4.17, we have 1 2 2 e−2(x −x y+y )/3 . f X,Y (x, y) = √ 3π 2 (3) µ2 = µY = 0, (1)

(2) By Theorem 4.30, the conditional expected value and standard deviation of X given Y = y are 2 E [X |Y = y] = y/2 σ X = σ1 (1 − ρ 2 ) = 3/4. ˜ (4) When Y = y = 2, we see that E[X |Y = 2] = 1 and Var[X |Y = 2] = 3/4. The conditional PDF of X given Y = 2 is simply the Gaussian PDF 1 2 e−2(x−1) /3 . f X |Y (x|2) = √ 3π/2 (5)

31

28. xy=[x’.4]. Y has a discrete uniform (1. 0 otherwise.12 One straightforward method is to follow the approach of Example 4. PX (x) = 1/4 x = 1. x 0 otherwise (1) Given X = x.1)). This observation prompts the following program: function xy=dtrianglerv(m) sx=[1.*rand(m. we use an alternate approach. and an independent uniform (0.Quiz 4.1). PY |X (y|x) = 1/x y = 1. given X = x.y’]. That is. 32 . y=ceil(x.px. . Instead. x) PMF. 1) random variable U . 4. x) PMF via Y = xU . .m). px=0. we can generate a sample value of Y with a discrete uniform (1.2. 4) PMF.3. 3. .25*ones(4. . First we observe that X has the discrete uniform (1. x=finiterv(sx. 2. Also.

(1) (2) =4 0 y2 dy2 0 y4 dy4 Quiz 5. 6 d x1 = 6x2 . each Yi must be a strictly positive integer. f X 2 .2 By deﬁnition of A. . x2 ) = f X 2 . y2 .X 2 (x1 . y3 ∈ {1. X 3 = y3 + y2 + y1 ] = (1 − p)3 p y1 +y2 +y3 (1) (2) (3) (4) By deﬁning the vector a = 1 1 1 . X 3 − X 2 = y3 ] = P [X 1 = y1 . Y2 = y2 .1 We ﬁnd P[C] by integrating the joint PDF over the region of interest. . . 2. Speciﬁcally. x3 ) = 0 unless 0 ≤ x 1 ≤ 33 . x3 ) = ∞ −∞ ∞ −∞ ∞ −∞ f X (x) d x3 = f X (x) d x1 = f X (x) d x2 = 1 6 d x3 = 6(1 − x2 ). we have f X 1 . 2. x3 ) = f X 1 . y3 ∈ {1. .} 0 otherwise (5) Quiz 5. the complete expression for the joint PMF of Y is PY (y) = (1 − p) p a y y1 . Since 0 < X 1 < X 2 < X 3 .}. Thus. . (1) (2) (3) x2 x2 0 x3 x1 In particular.X 3 (x2 . y2 . x3 ) = 0 unless 0 ≤ x2 ≤ x3 ≤ 1.Quiz Solutions – Chapter 5 Quiz 5.3 First we note that each marginal PDF is nonzero only if any subset of the xi obeys the ordering contraints 0 ≤ x 1 ≤ x2 ≤ x3 ≤ 1. Y2 = X 2 − X 1 and Y3 = X 3 − X 2 . Within these constraints. x2 ) = 0 unless 0 ≤ x 1 ≤ x2 ≤ 1. X 2 = y2 + y1 .X 3 (x2 . X 2 − X 1 = y2 . we must keep in mind that f X 1 . P [C] = 0 1/2 y2 1/2 y4 dy2 0 1/2 dy1 0 dy4 0 1/2 4dy3 = 1/4. PY (y) = P [Y1 = y1 . and that f X 1 . Y3 = y3 ] = P [X 1 = y1 . Y1 = X 1 .X 3 (x1 .X 3 (x1 . for y1 .X 2 (x1 . 6 d x2 = 6(x3 − x1 ). .

x3 ) = f X 1 . When 0 ≤ xi ≤ 1 for each xi . 0 ≤ w1 ≤ w2 ≤ 1 0 otherwise (2) Y1 . f X 1 (x1 ) = f X 2 (x2 ) = f X 3 (x3 ) = ∞ −∞ ∞ −∞ ∞ −∞ f X 1 . Y2 W= Y3 .X 2 (x1 .X 3 (x1 .4 In the PDF f Y (y). w) = 4 0 ≤ v1 ≤ v2 ≤ 1. the components have dependencies as a result of the ordering constraints Y1 ≤ Y2 and Y3 ≤ Y4 . x3 ) = 6(1 − x2 ) 0 ≤ x1 ≤ x2 ≤ 1 0 otherwise 6x2 0 ≤ x2 ≤ x3 ≤ 1 0 otherwise 6(x3 − x1 ) 0 ≤ x1 ≤ x3 ≤ 1 0 otherwise (4) (5) (6) Now we can ﬁnd the marginal PDFs. We can separate these constraints by creating the vectors V= The joint PDF of V and W is f V. x2 ) d x2 = f X 2 .X 3 (x2 . x2 ) = f X 2 .W (v. x3 ) d x2 = 1 x1 1 6(1 − x2 ) d x2 = 3(1 − x1 )2 6x2 d x3 = 6x2 (1 − x2 ) 2 6x2 d x2 = 3x3 (7) (8) (9) x2 x3 0 The complete expressions are f X 1 (x1 ) = f X 2 (x2 ) = f X 3 (x3 ) = 3(1 − x1 )2 0 ≤ x1 ≤ 1 0 otherwise 6x2 (1 − x2 ) 0 ≤ x2 ≤ 1 0 otherwise 2 3x3 0 ≤ x3 ≤ 1 0 otherwise (10) (11) (12) Quiz 5.x3 ≤ 1. Y4 (1) 34 . The complete expressions are f X 1 .X 3 (x2 .X 2 (x1 .X 3 (x2 . x3 ) d x3 = f X 2 .

each test is a subexperiment with three possible outcomes: L. 0 otherwise f W (w) = 2 0 ≤ w 1 ≤ w2 ≤ 1 0 otherwise (8) It is easy to verify that f V. f V (v) = = 0 1 f V.W (v.W (v.3. however it is simpler to just start from ﬁrst principles and observe that X 1 is the number of occurrences of L in ﬁve independent tests.x3 (0.x2 . for p1 = 0. A and R. .1. 5} ⎩ 0 otherwise We can ﬁnd the marginal PMF for each X i from the joint PMF PX (x). the vector X = X 1 X 2 X 3 indicating the number of outcomes of each subexperiment has the multinomial PMF ⎧ 5 ⎨ x1 . Similarly. . . PX (x) = (1) x1 . 1. w) dw1 dw2 1 w1 1 0 (3) (4) (5) 4 dw2 dw1 = Similarly.3)x1 (0. f W (w) = = 4(1 − w1 ) dw1 = 2 f V.6)x2 (0. 0. 0. Quiz 5. X 2 is a binomial (5. That is. .5 (A) Referring to Theorem 1. for 0 ≤ w1 ≤ w2 ≤ 1. .W (v.We must verify that V and W are independent. If we view each test as a trial with success probability P[L] = 0. p) = (5. x3 ∈ {0. In ﬁve trials.3) random variable.3. p2 = 0. conﬁrming that V and W are independent vectors. .1) random variable. PX i (x) = pix (1 − pi )5−x x = 0. 5 0 otherwise 35 5 x (2) . . x2 .6 and p3 = 0. .1)x3 x1 + x2 + x3 = 5. w) dv1 dv2 1 0 1 v1 (6) (7) 4 dv2 dv1 = 2 It follows that V and W have PDFs f V (v) = 2 0 ≤ v1 ≤ v2 ≤ 1 . For 0 ≤ v1 ≤ v2 ≤ 1. 1. we see that X 1 is a binomial (n. 0.19. w) = f V (v) f W (w).6) random variable and X 3 is a binomial (5.

1.1)2 + 0.6)2 (0.1458 = (3) (4) (5) In addition.32 (0.3(0. Quiz 5. w = 4. Hence.486 PW (4) = PX 1 (4) + PX 2 (4) + PX 3 (4) = 0.0802 (B) Since each Yi = 2X i + 4. . we need to ﬁnd E[X i X j ] for all i and j.32 (0. and w = 5. In particular. (1) (2) (3) E [X 2 ] = 0 1 E [X 3 ] = 0 1 To ﬁnd the correlation matrix R X .6 to ﬁnd the PMF of W . 2) + PX (2. Thus.1)] 2!2!1! = 0. 6x 2 (1 − x) d x = 1/2. we use 3x(1 − x)2 d x = 1/4. 1) 5![0. for w = 3.From the marginal PMFs.6)2 (0. PW (3) = PX 1 (3) + PX 2 (3) + PX 3 (3) = 0. PW (2) = PX (1. f 3 X 2 2 2 2 (1/8)e−(y3 −4)/2 4 ≤ y1 ≤ y2 ≤ y3 = 0 otherwise (9) (10) (6) (7) (8) Note that for other matrices A.1)2 + 0. since X 1 + X 2 + X 3 = 5 and since each X i is non-negative. To do so.6)(0. Furthermore. we can apply Theorem 5. we see that X 1 . PW (0) = PW (1) = 0. X 2 and X 3 are not independent. 2. the constraints on y resulting from the constraints 0 ≤ X 1 ≤ X 2 ≤ X 3 can be much more complicated.6 We start by ﬁnding the components E[X i ] = the marginal PDFs f X i (x) found in Quiz 5.10 to write f Y (y) = y1 − 4 y2 − 4 y3 − 4 1 . We start with 36 . 3x 3 d x = 3/4. X 2 = w.3: E [X 1 ] = 0 1 ∞ −∞ x f X i (x) d x of µ X . we must use Theorem 5. the event W = w occurs if and only if one of the mutually exclusive events X 1 = w. 2) + PX (2. or X 3 = w occurs.288 PW (5) = PX 1 (5) + PX 2 (5) + PX 3 (5) = 0. 2.

d x1 d x2 d x1 (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) 6x1 x2 (1 − x2 ) d x2 E [X 2 X 3 ] = 0 1 = E [X 1 X 3 ] = 0 2 4 [3x2 − 3x2 ] d x2 = 2/5 1 x1 1 6x1 x3 (x3 − x1 ) d x3 d x1 .X 2 (x1 . 1/5 2/5 3/5 Vector X has covariance matrix C X = R X − E [X] E [X] ⎡ ⎤ ⎡ ⎤ 1/10 3/20 1/5 1/4 ⎣3/20 3/10 2/5⎦ − ⎣1/2⎦ = 1/5 2/5 3/5 3/4 ⎡ ⎤ ⎡ 1/10 3/20 1/5 1/16 ⎣3/20 3/10 2/5⎦ − ⎣ 1/8 = 1/5 2/5 3/5 3/16 37 (15) (16) 1/4 1/2 3/4 ⎤ ⎡ ⎤ 3 2 1 1/8 3/16 1 ⎣ 2 4 2⎦ . 3x 4 d x = 3/5. 6x 3 (1 − x) d x = 3/10. x3 =1 x3 =x1 = 0 1 3 2 2 (2x1 x3 − 3x1 x3 ) d x1 = 0 1 2 4 [2x1 − 3x1 + x1 ] d x1 = 1/5.the second moments: E 2 X1 = 0 1 3x 2 (1 − x)2 d x = 1/10. 1/4 3/8 ⎦ = 80 1 2 3 3/8 9/16 (17) (18) . x2 ) .3. (4) (5) (6) 2 E X2 = 2 E X3 = 1 0 1 0 Using marginal PDFs from Quiz 5. the cross terms are E [X 1 X 2 ] = = = 0 ∞ ∞ −∞ −∞ 1 1 0 1 x1 3 4 [x1 − 3x1 + 2x1 ] d x1 = 3/20. X has correlation matrix ⎡ ⎤ 1/10 3/20 1/5 R X = ⎣3/20 3/10 2/5⎦ . 1 x2 1 0 2 6x2 x3 d x3 d x2 x1 x2 f X 1 . Summarizing the results.

invoked with the command format short. Since T is a Gaussian random vector. or CT .0221 0./(1+abs(D1-D2)). the ﬁrst two lines generate the 31 × 31 covariance matrix CT. The expected value of Y is µY = µT = 80.16 tells us that Y is a 1 dimensional Gaussian vector. Here is the output of julytemps.0000 1.97792616932396 38 . Here is the long format output: >> format long >> julytemps([70 75 80 85 90 95]) ans = Columns 1 through 4 0. 1 −1 b= 2 .02207383067604 Columns 5 through 6 0. 0 (1) It follows from Theorem 5.(1:31)).99997155736872 0. The ﬁnal step is to use the (·) function to calculate P[Y < T ].e. A=ones(31. Its just that the M ATLAB’s short format output. Thus. In julytemps. Next we calculate Var[Y ].5000 0. i.16. computing the covariance matrix by calculus can be a time consuming task. p=phi((T-80)/sqrt(CY)). [D1 D2]=ndgrid((1:31).This problem shows that even for fairly simple joint PDFs.0.0000 Note that P[T ≤ 70] is not actually zero and that P[T ≤ 90] is not actually 1. rounds off those probabilities.m.9779 1. just a Gaussian random variable. we observe that Y = AT where A = 1/31 1/31 · · · 1/31 .00002844263128 0.m: >> julytemps([70 75 80 85 90 95]) ans = 0. Theorem 5.18 that µ X = b and that C X = AA = 2 1 1 −1 2 1 5 1 = .. CT=36.7 We observe that X = AZ + b where A= 2 1 .50000000000000 0. function p=julytemps(T). 1 −1 1 2 (2) Quiz 5. Var[Y ] = ACT A . The covariance matrix of Y is 1 × 1 and is just equal to Var[Y ].99999999922010 0.0000 0. by Theorem 5.8 First.0000. CY=(A’)*CT*A. Quiz 5.1)/31.

. 1 + |i − j| (1) If we write out the elements of the covariance matrix. ⎥. A=ones(31. CT=toeplitz(c).. c30 · · · c1 c0 (2) This covariance matrix is known as a symmetric Toeplitz matrix. M ATLAB has a toeplitz function for generating them. . However. the i. . ⎢ c1 c0 CT = ⎢ .. ⎥ ⎢ . The function julytemps2 use the toeplitz to generate the correlation matrix CT . p=phi((T-80)/sqrt(CY)). 39 .1)/31. . ⎣ .. in this problem.0. c1 ⎦ . c=36. jth element is CT (i. C X has a special structure. We will see in Chapters 9 and 11 that Toeplitz covariance matrices are quite common. ⎥ . In fact. ./(1+abs(0:30)). we see that ⎡ ⎤ c0 c1 · · · c30 . .The ndgrid function is a useful to way calculate many covariance matrices. CY=(A’)*CT*A. j) = c|i− j| = 36 . function p=julytemps2(T).

(4) 40 .5. First. . the expected value of Wn is E [Wn ] = E [K 1 ] + · · · + E [K n ] = n E [K i ] = 2. .5 Thus the variance of K i is Var[K i ] = E K i2 − (E [K i ])2 = 7. . . That is. we note that the ﬁrst two moments of K i are E [K i ] = (1 + 2 + 3 + 4)/4 = 2. .5. . the random variables K 1 . . Hence. For w > 0. the PDF of W = X + Y is f W (w) = ∞ −∞ f X (w − y) f Y (y) dy = 6 0 w e−3(w−y) e−2y dy (2) Fortunately. the variance of the sum equals the sum of the variances. this integral is easy to evaluate. 4 0 otherwise (1) We can write Wn in the form of Wn = K 1 + · · · + K n . .Quiz Solutions – Chapter 6 Quiz 6. .5n (5) Since the rolls are independent. otherwise.25 Since E[K i ] = 2. By Theorem 6.5)2 = 1.1 Let K 1 . f W (w) = e−3w e y w 0 = 6 e−2w − e−3w (3) Since f W (w) = 0 for w < 0.25n Quiz 6.2 Random variables X and Y have PDFs f X (x) = 3e−3x x ≥ 0 0 otherwise f Y (y) = 2e−2y y ≥ 0 0 otherwise (1) (6) (4) (2) (3) Since X and Y are nonnegative.5 − (2. a conmplete expression for the PDF of W is f W (w) = 6e−2w 1 − e−w 0 w ≥ 0. . K n denote a sequence of iid random variables each with PMF PK (k) = 1/4 k = 1.3. Var[Wn ] = Var[K 1 ] + · · · + Var[K n ] = 1. . . K n are independent. W = X + Y is nonnegative. by Theorem 6.5 E K i2 = (12 + 22 + 32 + 42 )/4 = 7.

Since the expectation of the sum equals the sum of the expectations: E [W ] = α E [X 1 ] + α 2 E [X 2 ] + · · · + α n E [X n ] = 0 41 (3) . Theorem 6.2(es + 16e2s + 81e3s + 256e4s ) s=0 s=0 Quiz 6.8 says the MGF of J is φ J (s) = (φ K (s))m = (2) (B) Since the set of α j X j are independent Gaussian random variables. The ﬁrst derivative of φ K (s) is d φ K (s) = 0.4 (A) Each K i has MGF φ K (s) = E es K i = es (1 − ens ) es + e2s + · · · + ens = n n(1 − es ) ems (1 − ens )m n m (1 − es )m (1) Since the sequence of K i is independent.2(es + 4e2s + 9e3s + 16e4s ) s=0 s=0 =6 = 20 = 70.2)esk = 0.3 The MGF of K is 4 φ K (s) = E es K == k=0 (0.10 says that W is a Gaussian random variable.2 1 + es + e2s + e3s + e4s (1) We ﬁnd the moments by taking derivatives. we need only ﬁnd the expected value and variance.2(es + 2e2s + 3e3s + 4e4s ) ds Evaluating the derivative at s = 0 yields E [K ] = d φ K (s) ds = 0. Theorem 6. Thus to ﬁnd the PDF of W .2(es + 8e2s + 27e3s + 64e4s ) s=0 s=0 = 0.8 (4) (5) (6) (7) = 0.2(1 + 2 + 3 + 4) = 2 s=0 (2) (3) To ﬁnd higher-order moments.Quiz 6. we continue to take derivatives: E K2 = E K3 E K4 d 2 φ K (s) ds 2 d 3 φ K (s) = ds 3 d 4 φ K (s) = ds 4 = 0.

Since the α j X j are independent.5 (1) From Table 6. (3) (2) From Table 6. we can write the PDF of W as f W (w) = 1 2 2π σW e−w 2 /2σ 2 W (7) Quiz 6. The corresponding PDF is f R (r ) = (1/5)e−r/5 r ≥ 0 0 otherwise (4) This quiz is an example of the general result that a geometric sum of exponential random variables is an exponential random variable. the variance of the sum equals the sum of the variances: Var[W ] = α 2 Var[X 1 ] + α 4 Var[X 2 ] + · · · + α 2n Var[X n ] = α 2 + 2(α 2 )2 + 3(α 2 )3 + · · · + n(α 2 )n Deﬁning q = α 2 . we can use Math Fact B.6 to write Var[W ] = α 2 − α 2n+2 [1 + n(1 − α 2 )] (1 − α 2 )2 (6) (4) (5) 2 With E[W ] = 0 and σW = Var[W ]. we see that R has the MGF of an exponential (1/5) random variable.1.12.1. 42 . 1−s φ N (s) = 1 s 5e . 1 − 4 es 5 (1) From Theorem 6. each X i has MGF φ X (s) and random variable N has MGF φ N (s) where φ X (s) = 1 . R has MGF φ R (s) = φ N (ln φ X (s)) = Substituting the expression for φ X (s) yields φ R (s) = 1 5 1 5 1 5 φ X (s) 1 − 4 φ X (s) 5 (2) −s .

0227 (10) (11) (12) 43 . we use the central limit theorem and Table 3. (6) (7) (8) (9) (5) (4) (3) (6) Once again. Var[A] = Var[X 1 ] + · · · + Var[X 12 ] = 12 Var[X ] = 144 Hence.6 (1) The expected access time is E [X ] = ∞ −∞ x f X (x) d x = 0 12 x d x = 6 msec 12 (1) (2) The second moment of the access time is E X2 = ∞ −∞ x 2 f X (x) d x = 0 12 x2 d x = 48 12 (2) The variance of the access time is Var[X ] = E[X 2 ] − (E[X ])2 = 48 − 36 = 12. we write P [A > 75] = 1 − P [A ≤ 75] 75 − E [A] A − E [A] ≤ =1− P σA σA 75 − 72 ≈1− 12 = 1 − 0.1 to estimate P [A < 48] = P 48 − E [A] A − E [A] < σA σA 48 − 72 ≈ 12 = 1 − (2) = 1 − 0.4013 Note that we used Table 3. (3) Using X i to denote the access time of block i.1 to look up (0.Quiz 6. we can write A = X 1 + X 2 + · · · + X 12 Since the expectation of the sum equals the sum of the expectations. E [A] = E [X 1 ] + · · · + E [X 12 ] = 12E [X ] = 72 msec (4) Since the X i are independent.9773 = 0.5987 = 0.25). the standard deviation of A is σ A = 12 (5) To use the central limit theorem.

9545 (4) Since K 48 is a discrete random variable.8 The train interarrival times X 1 . (3) Using the ordinary central limit theorem and Table 3.1 yields P [30 ≤ K 48 ≤ 42] ≈ Recalling that (−x) = 1 − 42 − 36 − 3 (x).7 Random variable K n has a binomial distribution for n trials and success probability P[V ] = 3/4. we ﬁnd that W has expected value and variance E [W ] = 3/λ = 6 Var[W ] = 3/λ2 = 12 (2) (1) By the Central Limit Theorem. we found that the sum of three iid exponential (λ) random variables is an Erlang (n = 3. (1) The expected number of voice calls out of 48 calls is E[K 48 ] = 48P[V ] = 36.9687 (4) (5) Quiz 6. X 3 are iid exponential (λ) random variables. (2) The variance of K 48 is Var[K 48 ] = 48P [V ] (1 − P [V ]) = 48(3/4)(1/4) = 9 Thus K 48 has standard deviation σ K 48 = 3. (1) In Theorem 6.5 − 36 − 3 3 = 2 (2. we have (3) 30 − 36 3 = (2) − (−2) (2) (1) P [30 ≤ K 48 ≤ 42] ≈ 2 (2) − 1 = 0. λ) random variable. we can use the De Moivre-Laplace approximation to estimate P [30 ≤ K 48 ≤ 42] ≈ 42 + 0.Quiz 6.11. P [W > 20] = P √ W −6 20 − 6 > √ ≈ Q(7/ 3) = 2. The arrival time of the third train is W = X 1 + X 2 + X 3. X 2 . From Appendix A.66 × 10−5 √ 12 12 (3) 44 .5 − 36 30 − 0.16666) − 1 = 0.

100.sx). A graph of the PMF PW (w) appears in Figure 2 With some thought. we note that the MGF of W is φW (s) = The Chernoff bound states that P [W > 20] ≤ min e−20s φ X (s) = min s≥0 s≥0 λ λ−s 3 = 1 (1 − 2s)3 e−20s (1 − 2s)3 (4) (5) To minimize h(s) = e−20s /(1 − 2s)3 .11 says that for any w > 0. PW=PX. py=duniformpmf(0. [PX.0028 (9) (10) Although the Chernoff bound is relatively weak in that it overestimates the probability by roughly a factor of 12.(2) To use the Chernoff bound. SW=SX+SY. By contrast. sw=unique(SW). it should be apparent that the finitepmf function is implementing the convolution of the two PMFs.’\itP_W(w)’).9 One solution to this problem is to follow the approach of Example 6.sy=0:100. P [W > 20] = 1 − FW (20) = e−10 1 + 10 102 + 1! 2! = 61e−10 = 0.PY]=ndgrid(px. pw=finitepmf(SW. 3) random variable W satisﬁes 2 (λw)k e−λw FW (w) = 1 − (8) k! k=0 Equivalently.5.sy). Quiz 6.sw).sy).0338 s=7/20 (7) (3) Theorem 3. [SX. for λ = 1/2 and w = 20. it is a valid bound.0.SY]=ndgrid(sx. px=binomialpmf(100. pmfplot(sw.’\itw’. we set the derivative of h(s) to zero: −20(1 − 2s)3 e−20s + 6e−20s (1 − 2s)2 d h(s) = =0 ds (1 − 2s)6 (6) This implies 20(1 − 2s) = 6 or s = 7/20.19: %unifbinom100.py). the Central Limit Theorem approximation grossly underestimates the true probability. 45 .pw.*PY.PW. the CDF of the Erlang (λ.m sx=0:100. Applying s = 7/20 into the Chernoff bound yields P [W > 20] ≤ e−20s (1 − 2s)3 = (10/3)3 e−7 = 0.

01 0.002 0 0 20 40 60 80 100 w 120 140 160 180 200 Figure 2: From Quiz 6.006 0. 100) random variable.004 0.008 PW(w) 0. the PMF PW (w) of the independent sum of a binomial (100. 46 .9. 0.0.5) random variable and a discrete uniform (0.

µW = E X 2 Var[W ] 100 (1) = 1 −1 1 −1 x 2 f X (x) d x = 1/3 x 4 f X (x) d x = 1/5 (2) (3) E W2 = E X4 = Therefore Var[W ] = E[W 2 ] − µ2 = 1/5 − (1/3)2 = 4/45 and the mean square error is W 4/4500 = 0. 47 . and Var[W ] = 3 Var[X i ] = 225. P [W > 75] = P [W − E [W ] > 30] ≤ P [|W − E [W ]| > 30] ≤ 225 Var [W ] 1 = = 2 900 4 30 (3) (4) E [W ] 45 3 = = 75 75 5 (2) Quiz 7. Since each X i is uniform (0.1.Quiz Solutions – Chapter 7 Quiz 7. the mean square error is E (M100 (W ) − µW )2 = Observe that µ X = 0 so that W = X 2 .3 Deﬁne the random variable W = (X − µ X )2 .2 The arrival time of the third elevator is W = X 1 + X 2 + X 3 . (1) By the Markov inequality. Quiz 7.000889. Mn (X ) has variance Var[Mn (X )] = 1/n. P [W > 75] ≤ (2) By the Chebyshev inequality. Hence. By Theorem 7. 12 Thus E[W ] = 3E[X i ] = 45. Observe that V100 (X ) = M100 (W ). (30 − 0)2 Var [X i ] = = 75.6. By Theorem 7.1 An exponential random variable with expected value 1 also has variance 1. 30). Thus. (1) E [X i ] = 15. we need n = 100 samples.

we generate m = 1000 sample paths.995. 48 (7) (6) .Quiz 7.m. p(1 − p) (2) We must ensure for every value of p that 1 − α ≥ 0.3355 ≤ p ≤ 0. Since (x) is an increasing function of x.99 conﬁdence interval. Quiz 7. we must satisfy c n ≥ 1. Equivalently. The interval is wide because the 0.4 Assuming the number n of samples is large.58)/ n. Since p(1 − p) ≤ 1/4 for all p.95 (3) p(1 − p) √ for every value of p.58 p(1 − p). the number of trials in each trace. n n Note that if M100 (X ) = 0.m generates graphs the number of traces within one standard error as a function of the time. then the 0.9 conﬁdence interval estimate of p is 0. The program bernoullisample. we require that ≥ c ≥ (0. implying (c n/( p(1− p))) ≥ 0.41 c≥ √ = √ .41 0.e. i.5 Following the approach of bernoullitraces. √ This implies c n√ 2.13 which says that the interval estimate Mn (X ) − c ≤ p ≤ Mn (X ) + c (1) has conﬁdence coefﬁcient 1 − α where α =2−2 √ c n .645 0. we must have √ c n ≥ 0.1. each sample path having n = 100 Bernoulli traces. at time k. we require that 1.645 Mn (X ) − √ ≤ p ≤ Mn (X ) + √ . n n (5) (4) √ For the 0. OK(k) counts the fraction of sample paths that have sample mean within one standard error of p.99 conﬁdence interval estimate is 0.25)(2.65 p(1 − p).99 conﬁdence interval estimate is 0.01. we apply Theorem 7. we have α ≤ 0.9 or α ≤ 0. we can use a Gaussian approximation for Mn (X ).4645. In this case.65 0. 4 n n The 0.4. SinceE[X ] = p and Var[X ] = p(1 − p). the 0.99 conﬁdence is high. Since p(1 − p) ≤ 1/4 for all p.41 Mn (X ) − √ ≤ p ≤ Mn (X ) + √ .

m).68. stderr=sqrt(p*(1-p))./nn.’-s’).OK. OK=sum(abs(MN-p)<stderrmat.p). though perhaps unexpected.5. is examined in Problem 7./sqrt((1:n)’). x=reshape(bernoullirv(p.5): 1 0.m). the fraction of traces within one standard error approaches 2 (1) − 1 ≈ 0.2. as m gets large.m).0.function OK=bernoullisample(n.9 0.m*n). The following graph was generated by bernoullisample(100.7 0.6 0.4 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 As we would expect. The unusual sawtooth pattern.5000.8 0. MN=cumsum(x). 49 .5 0.n. plot(1:n. stderrmat=stderr*ones(1.m. nn=(1:n)’*ones(1.2)/m.

.1 From the problem statement.7. This rule simpliﬁes to 106 − 104 k ∈ A0 if k ≤ k = = 214. 50 . . the MAP and ML tests are the same.6. . 1. the CDF of the maximum of X 1 . otherwise k = 0. let R = {X ≤ r }.01. we must choose a rejection region for X . Quiz 8. the conditional PMFs of K are PK |H0 (k) = PK |H1 (k) = 104k e−10 k! 4 (4) (5) 0 106k e−10 k! 6 k = 0. FX (x) = FX i (x) 15 (2) = 1 − e−x 15 (3) To design a signiﬁcance test. . For a signiﬁcance level of α = 0. X 15 ≤ x] = [P [X i ≤ x]]15 . . 976 photons. X 2 ≤ x. otherwise (1) (2) 0 Since the two hypotheses are equally likely. This implies that for x ≥ 0.01 It is straightforward to show that r = − ln 1 − (0. .2 From the problem statement. X 15 obeys FX (x) = P [X ≤ x] = P [X 1 ≤ x.01)1/15 = 1. if we observe X < 1. the ML hypothesis rule is k ∈ A0 if PK |H0 (k) ≥ PK |H1 (k) . (3) k ∈ A1 otherwise.33 Hence. each X i has PDF and CDF f X i (x) = e−x x ≥ 0 0 otherwise FX i (x) = 0 x <0 1 − e−x x ≥ 0 (1) Hence. . . A reasonable choice is to reject the hypothesis if X is too small. 975. That is.33. we obtain α = P [X ≤ r ] = (1 − e−r )15 = 0. . then we accept hypothesis H1 . From Theorem 8. .Quiz Solutions – Chapter 8 Quiz 8. (4) Thus if we observe at least 214. then we reject the hypothesis. · · · . ln 100 ∗ k ∈ A1 otherwise. 1.

1)/m.T) %square law distortion recvr %P(error) for m bits tested %transmit v volts or -v volts. .’--k’..1)/m.’-k’. The modiﬁed program.T). Equivalently.T). the existing program sqdistor already calculates this miss probability PMISS = P01 and the false alarm probability PFA = P10 .1)). P10=sum((XX+d*(XX. %add N volts. function FM=sqdistrocplot(v.3 For the QPSK system.2).1). legend(’\it d=0. E/2 + N2 > 0 (1) Because of the symmetry of the signals..1).3’.0. Since N1 and N2 are iid Gaussian (0. it is easier to calculate the probability of a correct decision. FM=[P10(:) P01(:)]. FM1=sqdistroc(v. we have √ √ P [C] = P [C|H0 ] = P E/2 + N1 > 0 P E/2 + N2 > 0 (2) √ 2 (3) = P N1 > − E/2 √ 2 − E/2 (4) = 1− σ Since (−x) = 1 − of error is (x). σ ) random variables. FM2(:.d. FM5(:.Quiz 8.1). P01=sum((XX+d*(XX.FM5(:. the program sqdistrocplot.T(:)). For a QPSK system. otherwise 0 %FM = [P(FA) P(MISS)] x=(v+randn(m. FM2=sqdistroc(v. .m.m is essentially the same as sqdistor except the output is a matrix FM whose columns are the false alarm and miss probabilities.FM2(:. x= -v+randn(m.m calls sqdistroc three times to generate a plot that compares the receiver performance for the three requested values of d.m. the probability 2 PERR = 1 − P [C] = 1 − E 2σ 2 (5) Quiz 8.TT]=ndgrid(x.T). [XX. X 2 > 0|H0 ] = P E/2 + N1 > 0.T).m.’\it d=0. This implies the probability of a correct decision is P[C] = P[C|H0 ]. loglog(FM1(:. sqdistroc.3) ylabel(’P_{MISS}’).1’.. ’\it d=0. FM5=sqdistroc(v.2’. 51 .m.ˆ2)< TT). X 2 ) ∈ A j for some j = i. N is Gauss(0.2). a symbol error occurs when si is transmitted but (X 1 . Here is the modiﬁed code: function FM=sqdistroc(v.2).0.0.’:k’). the conditional probability of a correct decision is √ √ P [C|H0 ] = P [X 1 > 0. P[C|H0 ] = P[C|Hi ] for all i.T(:)). [XX. we have P[C] = 2( E/2σ 2 ).4 To generate the ROC..m.1)..TT]=ndgrid(x.ˆ2)>TT).2. xlabel(’P_{FA}’). Given H0 .. FM=[FM1 FM2 FM5]. Next.1.FM1(:.1) %add d(v+N)ˆ2 distortion %receive 1 if x>T.3..

1:3.To see the effect of d. 52 .T).100000.2 d=0. 10 0 10 −1 10 PMISS 10 10 −2 −3 −4 10 −5 d=0. Figure 3: The receiver operating curve for the communications system of Quiz 8.1 d=0. generated the plot shown in Figure 3.1:3. the commands T=-3:0. sqdistrocplot(3.3 −5 10 10 −4 10 −3 10 PFA −2 10 −1 10 0 T=-3:0.100000.T). sqdistrocplot(3.4 with squared distortion.

the conditional PDF of Y given X is f Y |X (y|x) = 2(y+x) 1+2x−3x 2 0 x ≤y≤1 otherwise (6) (4) The MMSE estimate of Y given X = x is y M (x) = E [Y |X = x] = ˆ x 1 2y 2 + 2x y dy 1 + 2x − 3x 2 y=1 y=x (7) (8) (9) 2y 3 /3 + x y 2 = 1 + 2x − 3x 2 = 2 + 3x − 5x 3 3 + 6x − 9x 2 53 . we calculate the marginal PDF for 0 ≤ y ≤ 1: f Y (y) = 0 y 2(y + x) d x = 2x y + x 2 x=y x=0 = 3y 2 (1) This implies the conditional PDF of X given Y is f X |Y (x|y) = f X.Quiz Solutions – Chapter 9 Quiz 9. y) = f Y (y) 2 3y + 2x 3y 2 0 0≤x ≤y otherwise (2) (2) The minimum mean square error estimate of X given Y = y is x M (y) = E [X |Y = y] = ˆ 0 y 2x 2 2x + 2 3y 3y d x = 5y/9 (3) ˆ Thus the MMSE estimator of X given Y is X M (Y ) = 5Y /9. For 0 ≤ x ≤ 1. f X (x) = x 1 2(y + x) dy = y 2 + 2x y y=1 y=x = 1 + 2x − 3x 2 (4) (5) For 0 ≤ x ≤ 1.1 (1) First. (3) To obtain the conditional PDF f Y |X (y|x).Y (x. we need the marginal PDF f X (x).

R = √ √ σT Cov [T. the correlation coefﬁcient of T and R is ρT.R ) = 9(1 − 3/4) = 9/4 L 2 σT (5) σR R= 2 2 σT 2 2 σT + σ X R= 3 R 4 (6) (7) Quiz 9.Quiz 9. E[T X ] = E[T ]E[X ] = 0 and E[T 2 ] = Var[T ].3 When R = r . Cov [T.4. R] = E [T R] = E [T (T + X )] = E T 2 + E [T X ] (3) (2) (1) Since T and X are independent and have zero expected value. ˆ TL (R) = Hence a ∗ = 3/4 and b∗ = 0. (4) From Deﬁnition 4. R] = = 3/2 σR Var[R] Var[T ] (4) (5) From Theorem 9. the optimum linear estimate of T given R is σT ˆ TL (R) = ρT. R] = Var[T ] = 9. the variance of the sum R = T + X is Var[R] = Var[T ] + Var[X ] = 9 + 3 = 12 (3) Since T and R have expected values E[R] = E[T ] = 0. E [R] = E [T ] + E [X ] = 0 (2) Since T and X are independent.R = σT /σ R . (6) By Theorem 9. Thus Cov[T. The conditional PDF of X given R is 1 2 f X |R (x|r ) = √ e−(x+40+40 log10 r ) /128 128π 54 (1) .4.R (R − E [R]) + E [T ] σR Since E[R] = E[T ] = 0 and ρT. the conditional PDF of X = Y −40−40 log10 r is Gaussian with expected value −40 − 40 log10 r and variance 64. the mean square error of the linear estimate is 2 e∗ = Var[T ](1 − ρT.2 (1) Since the expectation of the sum equals the sum of the expectations.8.

1236)10 (9) For example.6 m.3 −x/40 x ≥ −156.From the conditional PDF f X |R (x|r ). r ) = f X |R (x|r ) f R (r ) = 106 32π 1 √ r e−(x+40+40 log10 r ) 2 /128 (5) From Theorem 9.R (x.3 (0.6% larger than the ML estimate.2 to write the ML estimate of R given X = x as rML (x) = arg max f X |R (x|r ) ˆ r ≥0 (2) We observe that f X |R (x|r ) is maximized when the exponent (x + 40 + 40 log10 r )2 is minimized. Setting the derivative of f X.R (x. if x = −120dB.3 dB.R (x. note that a typical ﬁgure for the signal strength might be x = −120 dB. (6) rMAP (x) = arg max f X. yielding log10 r = −1 − x/40 or rML (x) = (0. r ) with respect to r to zero yields e−(x+40+40 log10 r ) Solving for r yields r = 10 1 25 log10 e −1 2 /128 1− 80 log10 e (x + 40 + 40 log10 r ) = 0 128 (7) 10−x/40 = (0. 55 . then rMAP (−120) = 123. the complete description of the MAP estimate is rMAP (x) = ˆ 1000 x < −156. That is.6. the MAP estimate takes into account that the distance can never exceed 1000 m. When x ≤ −156. for very low signal strengths. the MAP estimate of R given X = x is the value of r that maximizes f X. which is not possible in our probability model. ˆ For the MAP estimate. Hence.R (x. R ≤ 1000 m.1236)10−x/40 (8) This is the MAP estimate of R given X = x as long as r ≤ 1000 m. the MAP estimate is 23. r ). This minimum occurs when the exponent is zero. we can use Deﬁnition 9. When the measured signal ˆ strength is not too low. This reﬂects the fact that large values of R are a priori more probable than small values. we observe that the joint PDF of X and R is f X. However. This corresponds to a distance estimate of rML (−120) = 100 m. the above estimate will exceed 1000 m.1)10−x/40 m ˆ (3) (4) If the result doesn’t look correct. r ) ˆ 0≤r ≤1000 Note that we have included the constraint r ≤ 1000 in the maximization to highlight the fact that under our probability model.

9 1 RW = 0.1 0 .1 (9) . Y2 ] . To apply Theorem 9. 0 0. we calculate the correlation coefﬁcient ρ X 2 . Note that X and W have correlation matrices RX = 1 −0. n = 2 and we wish to estimate X 2 given the observation vector Y = Y1 Y2 .7. Y2 ] 1 =√ σ X 2 σY2 1.9 . (7) (8) Because X and W are independent. the LMSE estimate of X 2 given Y2 is X 2 (Y2 ) = a ∗ Y2 + b∗ where a∗ = Cov [X 2 .7. Y2 ] = E [X 2 Y2 ] = E [X 2 (X 2 + W2 )] = E X 2 = 1 2 2 Var[Y2 ] = Var[X 2 ] + Var[W2 ] = E X 2 + E W2 = 1.1.Y2 ) = 1 − L Cov [X 2 . 2 Cov [X 2 .1 (4) 1 1 = = 0.9 .Y2 = The expected square error is 2 e∗ = Var[X 2 ](1 − ρ X 2 .1 11 (5) (2) Since Y = X + W and E[X] = E[W] = 0. E[WX ] = 0. it follows that E[Y] = 0. RY = E YY = E (X + W)(X + W ) = E XX + XW + WX + WW . −0. (1) Because E[X] = E[Y] = 0.1 (2) (3) It follows that a ∗ = 1/1.7.1 −0. Because µ X 2 = µY2 = 0. we need to ﬁnd RYX 2 = E [YX 2 ] = E [Y1 X 2 ] E [(X 1 + W1 )X 2 ] = .0909 1. E [Y2 X 2 ] E [(X 2 + W2 )X 2 ] 56 (10) 1.9 1. This implies RY = E XX + E WW = RX + RW = In addition. Similarly. Thus we can apply Theorem 9. to compute the expected square error. E[XW ] = E[X]E[W ] = 0.1 (6) In terms of Theorem 9. it follows that b∗ = 0.Quiz 9. we need to ﬁnd RY and RYX 2 .4. Finally. Var[Y2 ] b ∗ = µ X 2 − a ∗ µ Y2 . −0.4 ˆ (1) From Theorem 9.

ˆ a = R−1 RYX = 11 + RW Y and the optimal linear estimator is ˆ X L (Y) = 1 11 + RW The mean square error is ˆ e∗ = Var[X ] − a RYX = 1 − 1 11 + RW L −1 −1 −1 (1) (2) (3) (4) 1 (5) Y (6) 1 (7) Now we note that RW has i.225 0. ˆ a = R−1 RYX 2 = Y −0. Thus E[X 1 X 2 ] −0. the correlation matrix of Y is RY = E YY = E (1X + W)(1 X + W ) = 11 E X 2 + 1E X W + E [WX ] 1 + E WW = 11 + RW Note that 11 is a 20 × 20 matrix with every entry equal to 1. (14) (13) Quiz 9. Thus.725 (12) Therefore.X 2 − a2rY2 . This implies RYX = E [YX ] = E [(1X + W)X ] = 1E X 2 = 1.7.9 RYX 2 = = .5 Since X and W have zero expected value.725Y2 . Y also has zero expected value.0725.7. This problem is atypical in that one does not usually get L 57 . Y E[WX ] = 0 and E[X W ] = 0 .225Y1 + 0. Since X and W are independent. the optimum linear estimator of X 2 given Y1 and Y2 is ˆ ˆ X L = a Y = −0. E[W1 X 2 ] = E[W1 ]E[X 2 ] = 0 and E[W2 X 2 ] = 0. (11) 2 1 E X2 By Theorem 9. j) = c|i− j|−1 .X 2 = 0. The question we must address is what value c minimizes e∗ . X L (Y) = a Y where a = R−1 RYX . jth entry RW (i. Thus. The mean square error is ˆ Var [X 2 ] − a RYX 2 = Var [X ] − a1rY1 . by ˆ ˆ ˆ Theorem 9. By the same reasoning.Since X and W are independent vectors.

xlabel(’c’). we will see that the answer is somewhat instructive.4500 1 0.to choose the correlation structure of the noise. the noises Wi have high variance and we would expect our estimator to be poor. [msemin. On the other hand. when c is small.ylabel(’e_Lˆ*’). In particular. [msec(k).4 0. RW=toeplitz(c. >> mquiz9minc(c) ans = 0. If this argument is not clear. We note that the answer is not obviously apparent from Equation (7). In this case.6 0.ˆ((0:19)-1)). if c is large Wi and W j are highly correlated and the separate measurements of X are very dependent. However. To ﬁnd the optimal value of c. function cmin=mquiz9minc(c). mse=1-((v1’)*af).optk]=min(msec). function [mse. for k=1:length(c). msec=zeros(size(c)). end plot(c.01:0. af=(inv(RY))*v1. i) = 1/c. we write a M ATLAB function mquiz9(c) to calculate the MSE for a given c and second function that ﬁnds plots the MSE for a range of values of c.8 e* L 0.af]=mquiz9(c). v1=ones(20. our 20 measurements will be all the same and one measurement is as good as 20 measurements. Thus. consider the extreme case in which every Wi and W j have correlation coefﬁcient ρi j = 1.1). RY=(v1*(v1’)) +RW.5 c 1 As we see in the graph.2 0 0. we observe that Var[Wi ] = RW (i. This would suggest that large values of c will also result in poor MSE.99. both small values and large values of c result in large MSE. 58 . Note in mquiz9 that v1 corresponds to the vector 1 of all ones.msec).af]=mquiz9(c(k)).01:0. cmin=c(optk). The following commands ﬁnds the minimum c and also produces the following graph: >> c=0.

.2 (2) 59 . the number of ongoing calls at the start of the experiment • N . the interarrival times of the N new arrivals • H . the call completion times of the H calls that hang up Quiz 10. . the number of new calls that arrive during the experiment • X 1 . (4) Rounding the samples in part (c) to the nearest integer degree yields a discrete time. s).01 950 ≤ r ≤ 1050 0 otherwise (1) The probability that a test produces a 1% resistor is p = P [990 ≤ R ≤ 1010] = 1010 990 (0. (2) If at every moment in time. then we obtain a discrete time.1 There are many correct answers to this question. .3 (1) Each resistor has resistance R in ohms with uniform PDF f R (r ) = 0. . D H . discrete valued process. . the number of calls that hang up during the experiment • D1 . One choice for an alternate set of random variables that would specify m(t. . Quiz 10. continuous valued process. then we obtain a continuous time.01) dr = 0. . discrete valued process. .2 (1) We obtain a continuous time. A correct answer speciﬁes enough random variables to specify the sample path exactly. (3) If we sample the process in part (a) every T seconds. X N . we round the temperature to the nearest degree. s) is • m(0.Quiz Solutions – Chapter 10 Quiz 10. continuous valued process when we record the temperature as a continuous waveform over time.

. t − 1 followed by a success on trial t. ..(2) In t seconds. 1. the number of 1% resistors found has the binomial PMF PN (t) (n) = p n (1 − p)t−n n = 0.2. This problem is easy if we view each resistor test as an independent trial. . Thus E [T2 |T1 = 10] = E [T1 |T1 = 10] + E T |T1 = 10 = 10 + E T = 10 + 5 = 15 (5) (6) Quiz 10.4 Since each X i is a N (0. ..1. (5) Note that once we ﬁnd the ﬁrst 1% resistor.5. a geometric random variable with success probability p has expected value 1/ p. .11. . (4) From Theorem 2.08192. . the probability the ﬁrst 1% resistor is found in exactly ﬁve seconds is PT1 (5) = (0. just as in Example 2. 2. exactly t resistors are tested. . That is. . Hence.X (n) (x1 . Each resistor is a 1% resistor with probability p. . In this problem. the number of additional trials needed to ﬁnd the second 1% resistor once again has a geometric PMF with expected value 1/ p since each independent trial is a success with probability p.. E[T1 ] = 1/ p = 5. . T1 has the geometric PMF PT1 (t) = (1 − p)t−1 p t = 1. the joint PDF of X = X 1 · · · X n is k (1) f X (x) = f X (1). A success occurs on a trial with probability p if we ﬁnd a 1% resistor. Consequently. independent of any other resistor. The ﬁrst 1% resistor is found at time T1 = t if we observe failures on trials 1. 1) random variable. . t 0 otherwise t n (3) (3) First we will ﬁnd the PMF of T1 . xn ) = i=1 f X (xi ) = 1 2 2 e−(x1 +···+xn )/2 n/2 (2π ) (2) 60 . T2 = T1 + T where T is independent and identically distributed to T1 . . each X i has PDF 1 2 f X (i) (x) = √ e−x /2 2π By Theorem 10. ..8)4 (0. . 9 otherwise (4) Since p = 0.2) = 0.

. (2) Quiz 10. 1. 61 .13 states that W (t) − W (s) is Gaussian with expected value E [X (t) − X (s)] = and variance E (W (t) − W (s))2 = E (W (t) − W (s))2 α(t − s) = α α (3) E [W (t) − W (s)] =0 √ α (2) Consider s ≤ s √ t. . This implies M1 and M2 are independent Poisson random variables each with PMF PMi (m) = α m e−α m! 0 m = 0. PM1 . the ith interarrival time of the N (t) process. . .7 First. Let X 1 . . . 1. This implies < √ [W (t) − W (s)]/ α is independent of W (s )/ α for all s ≥ s . otherwise (1) Since M1 and M2 are independent. . 000. denote the interarrival times of the N (t) process. X (t) − X (s) is independent of X (s ) for all s ≥ s . W (t) − W (s) is independent of W (s ). the joint PMF of M1 and M2 is ⎧ α m 1 +m 2 e−2α m 1 = 0. we look at the interarrival times. Since we count only evennumbered arrival for N (t). Y1 is an Erlang (n = 2. see Theorem 6. we note that for t > s.11. m 2 ) = PM1 (m 1 ) PM2 (m 2 ) = ⎪ ⎪ ⎩ 0 otherwise.Quiz 10. has the same PDF as Y1 (t). . .M2 (m 1 . Theorem 3. ⎪ m 1 !m 2 ! ⎪ ⎨ m 2 = 0. λ) random variable. . the expected number of packets in each hour is E[Mi ] = α = 36.6 To answer whether N (t) is a Poisson process. Since X 1 and X 2 are independent exponential (λ) random variables. . X (t) − X (s) = W (t) − W (s) √ α (1) Since W (t) − W (s) is a Gaussian random variable. 1. . the time until the ﬁrst arrival of the N (t) is Y1 = X 1 + X 2 . 2. X 2 . .5 The ﬁrst and second hours are nonoverlapping intervals. . we can conclude that the interarrival times of N (t) are not exponential random variables. That is. Quiz 10. Since one hour equals 3600 sec and the Poisson process has a rate of 10 packets/sec. Thus X (t) is a Brownian motion process with variance Var[X (t)] = t. Since s ≥ s . Since Yi (t). Thus N (t) is not a Poisson process.

14.. f X n1 . we have RY (t.. .. Quiz 10.. .X nm +k (x1 . .12: R(τ ) ≥ 0 R(τ ) = R(−τ ) |R(τ )| ≤ R(0) (1) (3) (2) (1) (1) R1 (τ ) = e−|τ | meets all three conditions and thus is valid. . .X nm (x1 .10 We must check whether each function R(τ ) meets the conditions of Theorem 10.. 2 (3) R3 (τ ) = e−τ cos τ is not valid because R3 (−2π ) = e2π cos 2π = e2π > 1 = R3 (0) (4) R4 (τ ) = e−τ sin τ also cannot be an autocorrelation function because 2 (2) R4 (π/2) = e−π/2 sin π/2 = e−π/2 > 0 = R4 (0) (3) 62 .. (2) R2 (τ ) = e−τ also is valid. . . . . . ..9 From Deﬁnition 10. . xm ) = f X (x1 ) f X (x2 ) · · · f X (xm ) Similarly. . f X n1 +k .. . .. E[X (t)N (t )] = E[X (t)]E[N (t )] = 0. τ ) = E [(X (t) + N (t)) (X (t + τ ) + N (t + τ ))] = E [X (t)X (t + τ )] + E [X (t)N (t + τ )] + E [X (t + τ )N (t)] + E [N (t)N (t + τ )] = R X (t. τ ). f X n1 . . . xm ) Since the random sequence is iid. Since RY (t.. we observe that since X (t) and N (t) are independent and since N (t) has zero expected value.. τ ) + R N (t. X 2 .X nm +k (x1 . . (2) (3) (4) Quiz 10. X 1 . . . n m + k.Quiz 10. for time instants n 1 + k. . .. n m and time offset k.. . xm ) = f X n1 +k .8 First we ﬁnd the expected value µY (t) = µ X (t) + µ N (t) = µ X (t). . xm ) = f X (x1 ) f X (x2 ) · · · f X (xm ) We can conclude that the iid random sequence is stationary. (1) To ﬁnd the autocorrelation.X nm (x1 . is a stationary random sequence if for all sets of time instants n 1 . . τ ) = E[Y (t)Y (t + τ )].. .. ..

X (t+1) (x0 . R X Y (t. In this case. suppose R X (τ ) = e−|τ | so that samples of X (t) far apart in time have almost no correlation. In fact. we conclude that X (t) and Y (t) are not jointly wide sense stationary. we see that by viewing a process backwards in time. τ ) depends on both t and τ . we see the same second order statistics.12 From the problem statement. τ ) = E [Y (t)Y (t + τ )] = E [X (−t)X (−t − τ )] = R X (−t − (−t − τ )) = R X (τ ) (1) (2) (3) Since E[Y (t)] = E[X (−t)] = µ X . Quiz 10. In this case. we can conclude that Y (t) is a wide sense stationary process. Y (t) = X (−t) and X (t) become less and less correlated.Quiz 10. To see why this is. as t gets larger. τ ) is just a function of τ . τ ) = E [X (t)Y (t + τ )] = E [X (t)X (−t − τ )] = R X (t − (−t − τ )) = R X (2t + τ ) (4) (5) (6) Since R X Y (t. E [X (t)] = E [X (t + 1)] = 0 E [X (t)X (t + 1)] = 1/2 Var[X (t)] = Var[X (t + 1)] = 1 The Gaussian random vector X = X (t) X (t + 1) sponding inverse CX = Since 1 1/2 1/2 1 C−1 = X (1) (2) (3) has covariance matrix and corre- 4 1 −1/2 1 3 −1/2 (4) 4 4 2 1 −1/2 x0 2 x − x0 x+ x1 = 1 x1 3 −1/2 3 0 the joint PDF of X (t) and X (t + 1) is the Gaussian vector PDF x C−1 x = x0 x1 X f X (t).11 (1) The autocorrelation of Y (t) is RY (t. (2) Since X (t) and Y (t) are both wide sense stationary processes. x1 ) = 1 (2π )n/2 [det (CX )]1/2 1 3π 2 e− 3 2 2 2 x0 −x0 x1 +x1 (5) 1 exp − x C−1 x X 2 (6) (7) =√ 63 . we can check whether they are jointly wide sense stationary by seeing if R X Y (t.

• If the head of schedule event is a departure. namely arrivals and departures. Quiz 10. Schedule the ﬁrst arrival to occur at S1 . The program simply executes the event at the head of the schedule. Delete the head-of-schedule event and go to step 2. admit the arrival. With the introduction of call blocking. increase the system state n by 1.120 100 80 M(t) 60 40 20 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 t 60 70 80 90 100 Figure 4: Sample path of 100 minutes of the blocking switch of Quiz 10. when an arrival occurs at time t. In particular. at discrete time instances. 64 . 3. we know the system state cannot change until the next scheduled event. The blocking switch is an example of a discrete event system.28 admits a deceptively simple solution in terms of the vector of arrivals A and the vector of departures D. After the head-of-schedule event is completed and any new events (departures in this system) are scheduled. check the state M(t). – If M(t) = c.13. Call blocking can be implemented by setting the service time of the call to zero so that the call departs as soon as it arrives. we need to know that M(t). • When the head-of-schedule event is the kth arrival is at time t. reduce the system state n by 1. Examine the head-of-schedule event. A simulation of the system moves from one time instant to the next by maintaining a chronological schedule of future events (arrivals and departures) to be executed. we must block the call. do not schedule a departure event. – If M(t) < c. the number of ongoing calls. and schedule a departure to occur at time t + Sn . we cannot generate these vectors all at once. an exponential (λ) random variable. Start at time t = 0 with an empty system. when M(t) = c. satisﬁes M(t) < c = 120.13 The simple structure of the switch simulation of Example 10. block the arrival. The logic of such a simulation is 1. 2. Otherwise. where Sk is an exponential (λ) random variable. The system evolves via a sequence of discrete events.

b]=simblockswitch(10. The complete program is shown in Figure 5. Chapter 12 develops techniques for analyzing and simulating systems described by Markov chains that are much simpler than the discrete event simulation technique shown here. we use the vector t as the set of time instances at which we inspect the system state. When the program is passed a vector t. a simple (but not elegant) way to do this is to have maintain two vectors: time is a list of timestamps of scheduled events and event is a the list of event types. we will learn that the blocking switch is an example of an M/M/c/c queue. The 5. 65 . In M ATLAB. A sample path of the ﬁrst 100 minutes of that simulation is shown in Figure 4. In most programming languages. this says that roughly the ﬁrst two percent of the simulation time was unusual. for very complicated systems.0057. The following instructions t=0:0.Thus we know that M(t) will stay the same until then.t).000 minutes. Thus this would account for only part of the disparity.000 minute full simulation produced a=49658 admitted calls and b=239 blocked calls. [m.a. the output [m a b] is such that m(i) is the number of ongoing calls at time t(i) while a and b are the number of admits and blocks. In our simulation.120.1:5000. The rest of the gap between 0. or event(i)=-1 if the ith scheduled event is a departure.0057 is that a simulation that includes only 239 blocks is not all that likely to give a very accurate result for the blocking probability. the discrete event simulation is widely-used and often very efﬁcient simulation method. (1) Pb = a+b In Chapter 12. event(i)=1 if the ith scheduled event is an arrival. We can estimate the probability a call is blocked as b ˆ = 0. In this case. generated a simulation lasting 5. we will learn that the exact blocking probability is given by Equation (12.93). One reason our simulation underestimates the blocking probability is that in a 5.” From the Erlang-B formula. Note that in Chapter 12. roughly the ﬁrst 100 minutes are needed to load up the switch since the switch is idle when the simulation starts at time t = 0. a result known as the “Erlang-B formula. plot(t.1.000 minute simulation. Nevertheless. However. Thus for all times t(i) between the current head-of-schedule event and the next. a kind of Markov chain. it is common to implement the event schedule as a linked list where each item in the list has a data structure indicating an event timestamp and the type of the event.0048.m). we set m(i) to the current switch state.0048 and 0. we can calculate that the exact blocking probability is Pb = 0.0.

.3d Admits %10d Blocks %10d’. %first event is an arrival timenow=0. %one more block. time(1)= [ ].1) ]. % clear current event if (eventnow==1) % arrival arrival=timenow+exponentialrv(lam. %total # blocks admits=0. end end Figure 5: Discrete event simulation of the blocking switch of Quiz 10. b4depart=time<depart.13..blocks)). end elseif (eventnow==-1) %departure n=n-1. event=[event(b4depart) -1 event(˜b4depart)]. event=[ 1 ]. depart=timenow+exponentialrv(mu. blocks=0. else blocks=blocks+1.c.mu. event(1)=[ ].t). immed departure disp(sprintf(’Time %10. timenow=time(1). % next arrival b4arrival=time<arrival.1). % # in system time=[ exponentialrv(lam. event=[event(b4arrival) 1 event(˜b4arrival)]. time=[time(b4arrival) arrival time(˜b4arrival)]. time=[time(b4depart) depart time(˜b4depart)]. n=0.admits. while (timenow<tmax) M((timenow<=t)&(t<time(1)))=n. n=n+1.. 66 .function [M. tmax=max(t).blocks]=simblockswitch(lam. %total # admits M=zeros(size(t)). if n<c %call admitted admits=admits+1.admits. timenow. eventnow=event(1).1).

Quiz Solutions – Chapter 11 Quiz 11.2. For τ < 0. 67 . 1 RY (τ ) = e−|τ | 2 Quiz 11. the autocorrelation function of the output is RY (τ ) = ∞ −∞ ∞ h(u) −∞ h(v)δ(τ + u − v) dv du = ∞ −∞ h(u)h(τ + u) du (2) For τ > 0. we can deduce that RY (τ ) = 1 e−|τ | by symmetry. RY (τ ) = Hence.5(1 + −1) = 0 (1) The autocorrelation of the output is 1 1 RY [n] = i=0 j=0 h i h j R X [n + i − j] 1 n=0 0 otherwise (2) (3) = 2R X [n] − R X [n − 1] − R X [n + 1] = 2 Since µY = 0. we 2 can double check.2 The expected value of the output is ∞ ∞ −τ h(u)h(τ + u) du = ∞ −τ 1 e−u e−τ −u du = eτ 2 (4) (5) µY = µ X n=−∞ h n = 0. The variance of Yn is Var[Yn ] = E[Yn ] = RY [0] = 1. µY = µ X ∞ −∞ h(t)dt = 2 0 ∞ e−t dt = 2 (1) Since R X (τ ) = δ(τ ). we have RY (τ ) = 0 ∞ e−u e−τ −u du = e−τ 0 ∞ 1 e−2u du = e−τ 2 (3) For τ < 0.1 By Theorem 11. Just to be safe though.

6 and to use Theorem 11. One way to ﬁnd the RY is to observe that RY has the Toeplitz structure of Theorem 11. Fo ﬁnd the PDF of the Gaussian vector Y. 4 0 0 1 1 1 1 (2) (3) In this case. we obtain RY = HRX H . following Theorem 11. we need to ﬁnd the covariance matrix CY .5 to ﬁnd the autocorrelation function ∞ ∞ RY [n] = i=−∞ j=−∞ h i h j R X [n + i − j].2 X (a) W = 10 (b) W = 1000 Figure 6: The autocorrelation R X (τ ) and power spectral density S X ( f ) for process X (t) in Quiz 11. Moreover. Quiz 11.1 0. Y = Y33 Y34 Y35 is a Gaussian random vector since X n is a Gaussian random process. each Yn has expected value E[Yn ] = µ X ∞ n=−∞ h n = 0. which equals the correlation matrix RY since Y has zero expected value.2 −0.x 10 8 0. it is simpler to observe that Y = HX where X = X 30 X 31 X 32 X 33 X 34 X 35 and ⎡ ⎤ 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 H = ⎣0 1 1 1 1 0⎦ . (1) Despite the fact that R X [k] is an impulse.3 By Theorem 11.1 0 τ 0.8.5.7. Since R X [n] = δn .13 with µX = 0 and A = H. RX = I.6 SX(f) 0. the identity matrix.4 0. or by directly applying Theorem 5.2 0 −15 −10 −5 0 f 5 10 15 SX(f) 6 4 2 0 −1500−1000 −500 10 R (τ) 5 0 −5 −2 −1 0 τ 1 x 10 2 −3 0 f 500 1000 1500 10 RX(τ) 5 0 −5 −0. using Equation (1) is surprisingly tedious because we still need to sum over all i and j such that n + i − j = 0. by Theorem 11. Thus E[Y] = 0. 68 .5. In this problem.

Y 2 (5) (6) A disagreeable amount of algebra will show det(CY ) = 3/1024 and that the PDF can be “simpliﬁed” to 16 7 2 7 2 1 2 y33 + y34 + y35 − y33 y34 + y33 y35 − y34 y35 exp −8 f Y (y) = √ 3 12 12 6 6π . L 69 . CY = RY = HH = 16 2 3 4 (4) It follows (very quickly if you use M ATLAB for 3 × 3 matrix inversion) that ⎡ ⎤ 7/12 −1/2 1/12 1 −1/2⎦ .9 h = R−1 RXn X n+1 = Xn 0. Xn = X n−1 X n and RXn = and RXn X n+1 = E 1.9 1.9 400 261 (3) It follows that the ﬁlter is h = 261/400 81/400 and the MMSE linear predictor is 81 261 ˆ X n−1 + Xn.1 0.81 81 = .9 for the case of k = 1 and M = 2.9 1. X n+1 = Xn 0.1 0.9 R X [0] R X [1] = 0. In this case.9 R X [1] −1 (1) (2) The MMSE linear ﬁrst order ﬁlter for predicting X n+1 at time n is the ﬁlter h such that ← − 1. 0. Y Quiz 11.81 X n−1 R X [2] = . one approach is to follow the method of Example 11. the PDF of Y is f Y (y) = 1 (2π )3/2 [det (CY )]1/2 1 exp − y C−1 y . (7) Equation (7) shows that one of the nicest features of the multivariate Gaussian distribution is that y C−1 y is a very concise representation of the cross-terms in the exponent of f Y (y).13 and to directly calculate ˆ (5) e∗ = E (X n+1 − X n+1 )2 .4 This quiz is solved using Theorem 11. C−1 = 16 ⎣−1/2 Y 1/12 −1/2 7/12 Thus.1 1 0.Thus ⎡ ⎤ 4 3 2 1 ⎣ 3 4 3⎦ . X n+1 = 400 400 (4) to ﬁnd the mean square error.1 R X [1] R X [0] 0.

It is noteworthy that the result is derived in a much simpler way in the proof of Theorem 9.3487.1. X = X n+1 and ← − ˆ a = h . Instead. we obtain ← − ← − ← − e∗ = R X [0] − 2 h RXn X n+1 + h RXn h L (9) (10) ← − with the substitution h = R−1 RXn X n+1 . Consulting Table 11.1. (13) L 0.9 400 1451 recalling that the blind estimate would yield a mean square error of Var[X ] = 1. In any case. graphs of S X ( f ) and R X (τ ) appear in Figure 6. 70 .81 81 261 e∗ = R X [0] − h RXn X n+1 = 1. the average power of X (t) is E X 2 (t) = ∞ −∞ W −W SX ( f ) d f = 5 d f = 10 Watts W (1) (2) The autocorrelation function is the inverse Fourier transform of S X ( f ). we obtain Xn e∗ = R X [0] − RXn X n+1 R−1 RXn X n+1 L Xn ← − = R X [0] − h RXn X n+1 (11) (12) Note that this is essentially the same result as Theorem 9. e∗ = E L ← − X n+1 − h Xn 2 (6) (7) (8) ← − ← − = E (X n+1 − h Xn )(X n+1 − h Xn ) ← − ← − = E (X n+1 − h Xn )(X n+1 − Xn h ) After a bit of algebra. the mean square error is 1 506 ← − 0. Since X n+1 = h Xn .5 (1) By Theorem 11. Quiz 11.1 − = = 0.13(b). we can derive the mean square error for an arbitary prediction ← − ˆ ﬁlter h. we note that 1 f S X ( f ) = 10 rect (2) 2W 2W It follows that the inverse transform of S X ( f ) is sin(2π W τ ) R X (τ ) = 10 sinc(2W τ ) = 10 (3) 2π W τ (3) For W = 10 Hz and W = 1 kHZ.7 by using the orthoginality property of the LMSE estimator. we see that observing X n−1 and X n improves the accuracy of our prediction of X n+1 .This method is workable for this simple problem but becomes increasingly tedious for higher order ﬁlters.7 with Y = Xn .

Quiz 11. where u(t) is the unit step function and a1 = 1/RC where RC = 10−4 is the ﬁlter time constant.17. First we need some preliminary facts. if R X [n] = 10δ[n].1. (2) Quiz 11.1. then ∞ S X (φ) = n=−∞ 10δ[n]e− j2π φn = 10 (1) Thus.17. SY ( f ) = H ∗ ( f )S X Y ( f ) = |H ( f )|2 S X ( f ). (This quiz is really lame!) Quiz 11.000 so that 1 (1) R X (τ ) = a0 e−a0 |τ | . That is. From Table 11. R X Y (t.7 Since Y (t) = X (t − t0 ).8 We solve this quiz using Theorem 11. H( f ) = (1) Theorem 11. R X [n] = 10δ[n]. a0 Consulting with the Fourier transforms in Table 11. the discrete time impulse δ[n] has a ﬂat discrete Fourier transform. we see that 2 2a0 1 2a0 SX ( f ) = = 2 2 + (2π f )2 a0 a0 a0 + (2π f )2 (2) The RC ﬁlter has impulse response h(t) = a1 e−a1 t u(t). 71 (5) 2a0 a1 . Thus the Fourier transform of R X Y (τ ) = R X (τ − t0 ) = g(τ − t0 ) is S X Y ( f ) = S X ( f )e− j2π f t0 . τ ) = R X Y (τ ) = R X (τ − t0 ).17. S X Y ( f ) = H ( f )S X ( f ) = (2) Again by Theorem 11. Let a0 = 5. From Table 11. 2 [a1 + j2π f ] a0 + (2π f )2 (4) a1 a1 + j2π f (3) . τ ) = E [X (t)Y (t + τ )] = E [X (t)X (t + τ − t0 )] = R X (τ − t0 ) (1) We see that R X Y (t.6 In a sampled system. we recall the property that g(τ − τ0 ) has Fourier transform G( f )e− j2π f τ0 .1.

we obtain RY (τ ) = 2 a1 e−a0 |τ | − a0 a1 e−a1 |τ | 2 2 a1 − a0 . some algebra will show that SY ( f ) = where K0 = Thus. we see that RY (τ ) = K0 K1 a e−a0 |τ | + 2 a1 e−a1 |τ | 2 0 2a0 2a1 (11) Substituting the values of K 0 and K 1 . 72 . the output signal has almost as much power as the input. (9) (10) Consulting with Table 11. Using partial fractions and the Fourier transform table.000 rad/sec. we can either use basic calculus and ∞ calculate −∞ SY ( f ) d f directly or we can ﬁnd RY (τ ) as an inverse transform of SY ( f ). a1 + a0 3 (13) Note that the input signal has average power R X (0) = 1.000 rad/sec and the signal X (t) has most of its its signal energy below 5. SY ( f ) = |H ( f )|2 S X ( f ) = 2 2a0 a1 2 2 a1 + (2π f )2 a0 + (2π f )2 2 a1 a1 a1 = 2 (a1 + j2π f ) (a1 − j2π f ) a1 + (2π f )2 (6) (7) (3) To ﬁnd the average power at the ﬁlter output. SY ( f ) = 2 2 2a0 a0 + (2π f )2 2a1 a1 + (2π f )2 2 a0 K0 K1 + + (2π f )2 a1 + (2π f )2 2 −2a0 a1 2 2 a1 − a0 (8) 2 2a0 a1 2 a1 − a0 . 2 K1 = . In particular. (12) The average power of the Y (t) process is RY (0) = a1 2 = . the latter method is actually less algebra.1. Since the RC ﬁlter has a 3dB bandwidth of 10.Note that |H ( f )|2 = H ( f )H ∗ ( f ) = Thus. 2 2 2a0 2a1 K0 K1 + 2 .

146) and (11. we see from Table 11. (5) From Equation (11.9 This quiz implements an example of Equations (11.146) and (11.000 Hz.1 that SX ( f ) = 1 f rect . (2) RY X (τ ) = R X (τ ). decreasing the single-sided bandwidth B increases the power spectral density of the noise over frequencies | f | < B. it follows that SY ( f ) = S X ( f ) + S N ( f ). 4 10 104 (4) The noise power spectral density can be written as S N ( f ) = N0 rect f 2B = 1 f rect 2B 2B .147). at peace with the derivations. we note that Example 10.147) for a system in which we ﬁlter Y (t) = X (t) + N (t) to produce an optimal linear estimate of X (t). This implies R N (0) = ∞ −∞ SN ( f ) d f = B −B N0 d f = 2N0 B (3) Thus N0 = 1/(2B). where W = 5. (1) Since µ N = 0. R N (0) = Var[N ] = 1. SY X ( f ) = S X ( f ).147).24 showed that RY (τ ) = R X (τ ) + R N (τ ).Quiz 11. (2) Since R X (τ ) = sinc(2W τ ). (6) 73 . the optimal ﬁlter is ˆ H( f ) = SX ( f ) = SX ( f ) + SN ( f ) 1 104 1 104 rect + f 104 1 2B rect f 104 rect f 2B . The ˆ solution to this quiz is just to ﬁnd the ﬁlter H ( f ) using Equation (11. Comment: Since the text omitted the derivations of Equations (11.146) and to calculate the mean square error e L ∗ using Equation (11.146). Taking Fourier transforms. (1) Now we can go on to the quiz. Because the noise process N (t) has constant power R N (0) = 1.

the mean square error of the estimate is e∗ = L = ∞ −∞ ∞ −∞ S X ( f )S N ( f ) df SX ( f ) + SN ( f ) 1 104 1 104 (7) f 2B f 2B rect f 104 f 104 1 2B rect rect rect + 1 2B d f. for all values of B. In this case.05 requires B ≤ 5. As B is decreased. The result is that the MSE goes down. The noise power is always Var[N ] = 1 Watt. Thus as ˆ B descreases. the ﬁlter suppresses less of the signal of X (t). From Equation (11.ˆ ˆ (3) We produce the output X (t) by passing the noisy signal Y (t) through the ﬁlter H ( f ). but only over a bandwidth B that is decreasing.10 It is fairly straightforward to ﬁnd S X (φ) and SY (φ). let’s suppose B ≤ W . L Although this completes the solution to the quiz. what is happening may not be obvious.5 × 104 guarantees e∗ ≤ 0. Two examples of the ﬁlter H ( f ) are shown in Figure 7. The Wiener ﬁlter removes the noise that is outside the band of the desired signal.147). the ﬁlter H ( f ) makes an increasingly deep and narrow notch at frequencies ˆ | f | ≤ B.000. ˆ the Wiener ﬁlter H ( f ) is an ideal (ﬂat) lowpass ﬁlter ⎧ 1 ⎨ 104 | f | < 5. The following M ATLAB program generates and plots the functions shown in Figure 8 74 .05. We can go back and consider the case B > W later. As B shrinks. Since the problem asks us to L ﬁnd the largest possible B. Finally. the MSE is e∗ L = 1 1 104 2B 1 1 −B 104 + 2B B df = 1 104 1 104 + 1 2B = 1 1+ 5. we need to whether B ≤ W . Thus increasing B spreads the constant 1 watt of power of N (t) over more bandwidth. B ≥ 9.05.000 B (9) To obtain MSE e∗ ≤ 0.16 Hz. When B ≤ W . The only thing to keep in mind is to use fftc to transform the autocorrelation R X [ f ] into the power spectral density S X (φ). 1 ˆ + 1 (10) H( f ) = 104 2B ⎩ 0 otherwise.000/19 = 263. (8) To evaluate the MSE e∗ . S N ( f ) = 1/2B over frequencies | f | < W . L Quiz 11. In L particular. we note that we can choose B very large and also achieve MSE e∗ = 0. when B > W = 5000. the PSD S N ( f ) becomes increasingly tall. The mean square error is e∗ L = 1 1 104 2B 1 1 −5000 104 + 2B 5000 df = 1 2B 1 104 + 1 2B = 1 B 5000 +1 (11) In this case.

h10=0. However.*((abs(H10)).N). Although these imaginary parts have no computational signiﬁcance. the ﬁlter H (φ) ﬁlters out almost all of the high frequency components of X (t). xlabel(’n’). h2=0.26. 75 . %impulse/filter response: M=2 SY2=SX. %autocorrelation and PSD stem(0:N-1.5*[1 1]. stem(0:N-1. the low pass moving average ﬁlter for M = 10 removes the high frquency components and results in a ﬁlter output that varies very slowly. we generate stem plots of the magnitude of each power spectral density. when M = 10.ylabel(’S_X(n/N)’). %mquiz11. xlabel(’n’). H2=fft(h2.ˆ2). SY2 and SY10 in mquiz11 should all be realvalued vectors.N).abs(sx)). stem(0:N-1.ylabel(’S_{Y_2}(n/N)’).1*ones(1. figure. figure.abs(SY2)).10). the ﬁnite numerical precision of M ATLAB results in tiny imaginary parts.abs(SY10)). Relative to M = 2.ylabel(’S_{Y_{10}}(n/N)’).ˆ2).N). SX=fftc(rx. rx=[2 4 2]. note that the vectors SX. In the context of Example 11. %impulse/filter response: M=10 SY10=sx.* ((abs(H2)). H10=fft(h10. As an aside.9.1 H(f) 0.5 0 H(f) −5000 −2000 0 f 2000 5000 1 0. Hence.5 0 −5000 −2000 0 f 2000 5000 B = 500 B = 2500 Figure 7: Wiener ﬁlter for Quiz 11.m N=32. %PSD of Y for M=2 xlabel(’n’). they tend to confuse the stem function.

SY (n/N ) for M = 2. and Sφ (n/N ) for M = 10 using an N = 32 point DFT. 76 . graphs of S X (φ).10.10 SX(n/N) 5 0 0 5 10 15 n 20 25 30 35 10 SY (n/N) 2 5 0 0 5 10 15 n 20 25 30 35 10 SY (n/N) 10 5 0 0 5 10 15 n 20 25 30 35 Figure 8: For Quiz 11.

2 0.1 The system has two states depending on whether the previous packet was received in error.2 The eigenvalues of P are λ1 = 0 λ2 = 0.6 0. the Markov chain and the transition matrix are ⎡ ⎤ 0.4 0.2 0.5 1 λ1 0 0 0 −1 ⎦ 0 1 ⎦ ⎣ 0 λ2 0 ⎦ ⎣ 1 P = S−1 DS = ⎣ 0.2 0 0 ⎦ Pn = S−1 Dn S = ⎣0.5 1 (3) where si .4 0 0 λ3 0. Algebra will verify that the n-step transition matrix is ⎡ ⎡ ⎤ ⎤ 0.2 0.6 P = ⎣0.90 (3) Quiz 12.6 −0.5 0 −0.01 0.6 0.2 0.99 0.9 (1) Since each X n must be either 0 or 1.1 (2) These conditional probabilities correspond to the transition matrix and Markov chain: 0. is the left eigenvector of P satisfying si P = λi si .4 λ3 = 1 (1) (2) We can diagonalize P into ⎤⎡ ⎡ ⎤ ⎤⎡ −0.2 From the problem statement.6 0.6 0. the ith row of S.10 0.2⎦ + (0.2 0.4)n ⎣ 0 (4) −0.4 0.1 1 P= 0.01 0.5 −0.9 P X n+1 = 0|X n = 1 = 0.3 The Markov chain describing the factory status and the corresponding state transition matrix are 77 .5 0.99 P X n+1 = 1|X n = 1 = 0.5 0 0.4 0.5 1 −0. From the problem statement. we are given the conditional probabilities P X n+1 = 0|X n = 0 = 0.6 0.5 0.6 0 0.2 Quiz 12. we can conclude that P X n+1 = 1|X n = 0 = 0.6 0.2⎦ 1 0 1 0 0.2 0.4 0.99 0.2 −0.6 0.01 0 0.6 0.6 0.Quiz Solutions – Chapter 12 Quiz 12.

. the state n can take on the values 0.9 0.4 The communicating classes are C1 = {0. .1 0 1 1 1 ⎡ ⎤ 0. π2 = 1/12.5 At any time t. This implies π0 + π1 + π2 = π0 (1 + 0. (3) (2) The states in C1 and C3 are aperiodic. Once the system exits C2 . Quiz 12. the states in C2 are transient. The state transition probabilities are Pn−1. Once the system enters a state in C1 .1π0 and π2 = π1 . 6} (1) π1 = 1/12. the class C1 is never left. 1 … 78 . 1. . the states in C3 are recurrent. . 1} C2 = {2. 5.0 P [K > n] P [K > n − 1] P [K = n] = P [K = n|K > n − 1] = P [K > n − 1] (1) (2) (3) The Markov chain resembles P[K=5] P[K=4] P[K= 1] P[K=2] P[K=3] 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 . That is.1 + 0. Thus the states in C1 are recurrent.0.9 0. the system of equations π = π P yields π1 = 0.1) = 1 It follows that the limiting state probabilities are π0 = 5/6. C1 is a recurrent class.1 0 0 1⎦ P=⎣ 0 1 0 0 (1) 2 With π = π0 π1 π2 . The states in C2 have period 2. 2. Quiz 12.. the states in C2 are never reentered.. Similarly. 3} C3 = {4.n = P [K > n|K > n − 1] = Pn−1. On the other hand.

Thus the period of state 0 is d = 2. We verify this pattern by showing that πk = π0 P[K > k] satisﬁes Equation (6): π0 P [K > k − 1] = π0 P [K = k] + π0 P [K > k] . we have k − 1 units of time left after the state 0 counter reset. and we randomly reset the counter to a new value K = k and then we count down k units of time. n=0 > k] = E[K ]. we obtain π1 = π0 (1 − P [K = 1]) = π0 P [K > 1] Similarly. . 2. . then W has a discrete PMF representing the remaining time of the counter at a time in the distant future. Since we spend one unit of time in each state. π1 = π0 P [K = 2] + π2 . If we have a random variable W such that the PMF of W satisﬁes PW (n) = πn .The stationary probabilities satisfy π0 = π0 P [K = 1] + π1 . the number of transitions need to return to state 0 is always a multiple of 2. This implies πn = P [K > n] E [K ] (10) This Markov chain models repeated random countdowns. Equation (5) implies π2 = π1 − π0 P [K = 2] = π0 (P [K > 1] − P [K = 2]) = π0 P [K > 2] (8) (7) (4) (5) k = 1. From Problem 2. we solve the system of equations π = πP and 3 i=0 πi = 1: π0 = (3/4)π1 + (1/4)π3 π1 = (1/4)π0 + (1/4)π2 π2 = (1/4)π1 + (3/4)π3 1 = π0 + π1 + π2 + π3 79 (1) (2) (3) (4) . From Equation (4).5. . we obtain π0 ∞ P[K > k] = 1. Quiz 12. When the counter expires. (2) To ﬁnd the stationary probabilities. πk−1 = π0 P [K = k] + πk . The system state is the time until the counter expires. When we apply we recall that ∞ k=0 πk ∞ k=0 P[K (9) = 1. . . the system is in state 0.6 (1) By inspection. including state 0. .11. (6) This suggests that πk = π0 P[K > k].

(1) Thus the CDF of T00 satisﬁes FT00 (n) = 1− P[T00 > n] = 1−1/n α .Solving the second and third equations for π2 and π3 yields π2 = 4π1 − π0 π3 = (4/3)π2 − (1/3)π1 = 5π1 − (4/3)π0 (5) Substituting π3 back into the ﬁrst equation yields π0 = (3/4)π1 + (1/4)π3 = (3/4)π1 + (5/4)π1 − (1/3)π0 (6) This implies π1 = (2/3)π0 .7 The Markov chain has the same structure as that in Example 12.(4/5)a a 2 3 4 … The event T00 > n occurs if the system reaches state n before returning to state 0.(3/4) 1 .22. nα (2) 80 . which occurs with probability P [T00 1 > n] = 1 × 2 α 2 × 3 α n−1 × ··· × n α = 1 n α . To determine whether state 0 is recurrent. we choose π0 so the state probabilities sum to 1: 16 2 5 1 = π0 + π1 + π2 + π3 = π0 1 + + + 2 = π0 (7) 3 3 3 It follows that the state probabilities are π0 = 3 16 π1 = 2 16 π2 = 5 16 π3 = 6 16 (8) (3) Since the system starts in state 0 at time 0. It follows from the ﬁrst and second equations that π2 = (5/3)π0 and π3 = 2π0 . we can use Theorem 12. The only difference is the modiﬁed transition rates: 1 (1/2)a (2/3)a (3/4) a (4/5) a 0 1.(1/2) a 1 1 .14 to ﬁnd the limiting probability that the system is in state 0 at time nd: lim P00 (nd) = dπ0 = 3 8 (9) n→∞ Quiz 12.(2/3) a 1 . Lastly. we observe that for all α > 0 P [V00 ] = lim FT00 (n) = lim 1 − n→∞ n→∞ 1 = 1.

On the other hand.5. for α > 1. ( We also note that if α = 0. the Markov chain is positive recurrent. In this problem. ∞ 1 E [T00 ] = 2 + . Applying this result. 1/n α ≥ 1/n and it follows that ∞ E [T00 ] ≥ 1 + n=1 1 = ∞. it will be simpler to use the result of Problem 2. Since the chain has only one communicating class.24. nα (3) For 0 < α ≤ 1.) To determine whether the chain is null recurrent or positive recurrent. In Example 12.Thus state 0 is recurrent for all α > 0. we need to calculate E[T00 ]. Quiz 12. (5) nα n=2 Note that for all n ≥ 2 1 ≤ nα ∞ n n−1 dx xα (6) This implies E [T00 ] ≤ 2 + =2+ n n=2 n−1 ∞ dx 1 dx xα (7) (8) xα x −α+1 =2+ −α + 1 ∞ =2+ 1 1 <∞ α−1 (9) Thus for all α > 1. the expected time to return to state 0 is ∞ ∞ E [T00 ] = n=0 P [T00 > n] = 1 + n=1 1 . n (4) We conclude that the Markov chain is null recurrent for 0 < α ≤ 1. then all states are transient.11 which says that ∞ P[K > k] = k=0 E[K ] for any non-negative integer-valued random variable K . we did this by deriving the PMF PT00 (n).8 The number of customers in the ”friendly” store is given by the Markov chain (1-p)(1-q) p (1-p)(1-q) p (1-p)(1-q) p (1-p)(1-q) 0 (1-p)q 1 (1-p)q ××× i (1-p)q (1-p)q i+1 ××× 81 . all states are recurrent.

. i = 0.01 2 3 3 3 4 Note that q10 = 3. the limiting state probabilities are πi = (1 − α)α i . we have that for α < 1. From the Markov chain. . . 1.1 since the task completes at rate 3 per msec and the processor reboots at rate 0.01 p3 = 2 p2 + 3 p4 5. . for α ≥ 1 or.In the above chain.01 0. . . πi p = πi+1 (1 − p)q. . α= (1 − p)q Requiring the state probabilities to sum to 1. ∞ ∞ (3) πi = π0 i=0 i=0 αi = π0 = 1.9 The continuous time Markov chain describing the processor is 2 2 2 2 0 3. p ≥ q/(1 − q). . the limiting state probabilities do not exist.01 1 3 0. 014. p3 in terms of p2 and so on. 620 p0 1. . 1−α (4) Thus for α < 1. 5. i + 2. yielding p4 = 20 p3 31 p3 = 620 p2 981 p2 = 82 19620 p1 31431 p1 = 628. 1.}. (5) In addition. .13 with state space partitioned between S = {0. 381 (1) . an existing customer gets one unit of service and then departs the store. . we have that πi = π0 α i where p .01 0. we obtain the following useful equations for the stationary distribution. equivalently. we note that (1 − p)q is the probability that no new customer arrives. 1. By applying Theorem 12. we see that for any state i ≥ 0.1 per msec and the rate to state 0 is the sum of those two rates. .. Quiz 12.01 p2 = 2 p1 + 3 p3 3. . 2. (1 − p)q (1) (2) Since Equation (2) holds for i = 0.01 p4 = 2 p3 We can solve these equations by working backward and solving for p4 in terms of p3 . i} and S = {i + 1. This implies πi+1 = p πi .01 p1 = 2 p0 + 3 p2 5.

2573 p2 = 0. . . pn = 1 yields c (2) p0 = n=0 ρ c ρ/c ρ /n! + c! 1 − ρ/c n −1 (3) 83 . . . c + 2. c n−c c p0 (ρ/c) ρ /c! n = c + 1.1606 p3 = 0. 2. . . . the stationary probabilities must satisfy pn = (ρ/n) pn−1 n = 1.10 The M/M/c/∞ queue has Markov chain λ λ λ λ λ (2) 0 µ 1 2µ cµ c cµ c+1 cµ From the Markov chain. c + 2. (1) It is straightforward to show that this implies pn = The requirement that ∞ n=0 p0 ρ n /n! n = 1. 443. .0655 Quiz 12. .1015 p4 = 0. 2. 014. . 401 and the stationary probabilities are p0 = 0. c (ρ/c) pn−1 n = c + 1.Applying p0 + p1 + p2 + p3 + p4 = 1 yields p0 = 1. . . 381/2. .4151 p1 = 0. .

- YATES BOOK+SOL+QUIZ SOL
- Yates - Probability and Stochastic Processes (2nd Edition)
- Probability and Stochastic Processes
- Principles of Communication
- Probability and Stochastic Processes
- [솔루션] Probability and Stochastic Processes 2nd Roy D. Yates and David J. Goodman 2판 확률과 통계 솔루션 433 4000
- sol_manual
- Probability and Stochastic Processes 2nd Roy d Yates and David j Goodman 2
- Probability and Stochastic Processes 3rd Edition Roy D. Yates Chapter 1 Solutions
- Sol Manual
- Probability and Stochastic Processes 3rd Edition Roy D. Yates Chapter 2 Solutions
- Communications Practice12-Satellite Communications
- Probability and Stochastic Processes 3rd Edition Quiz Solutions
- Stochastic processes
- Part 6
- Stochastic Processes
- Stochastic Process
- Introduction to Probability 1st Ed. Problem Solutions
- [线性系统理论与设计（第三版）].(Linear.System.Theory.and.Design.).Chi-Tsong.Chen.3rd.Edition
- Probability & Stochastic Processes - A Friendly Introduction for Electrical & Computer Engineers
- Stochastic Processes
- Probability Random Variables and Random Processes Part 1
- Comm
- PROBA CAPITULO1
- Probability and Stochastic Processes
- Probability and Stochastic Processes 2E, By Roy D. Yates , David J. Goodman
- Matlab Ref
- Probability and Stochastic Processes 3rd Edition Student Solutions Manual

Read Free for 30 Days

Cancel anytime.

Close Dialog## Are you sure?

This action might not be possible to undo. Are you sure you want to continue?

Loading